CA2666401A1 - Acylaminopyrazoles for treating cardiovascular diseases - Google Patents
Acylaminopyrazoles for treating cardiovascular diseases Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CA2666401A1 CA2666401A1 CA002666401A CA2666401A CA2666401A1 CA 2666401 A1 CA2666401 A1 CA 2666401A1 CA 002666401 A CA002666401 A CA 002666401A CA 2666401 A CA2666401 A CA 2666401A CA 2666401 A1 CA2666401 A1 CA 2666401A1
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- alkyl
- substituents
- another
- substituted
- group
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D231/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings
- C07D231/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings
- C07D231/10—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
- C07D231/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,2-diazole or hydrogenated 1,2-diazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
- C07D231/38—Nitrogen atoms
- C07D231/40—Acylated on said nitrogen atom
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
- A61P1/04—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
- A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
- A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
- A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
- A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
- A61P35/04—Antineoplastic agents specific for metastasis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
- A61P7/02—Antithrombotic agents; Anticoagulants; Platelet aggregation inhibitors
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
- A61P9/12—Antihypertensives
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
- C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
- C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
- C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
- C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
- C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
- C07D403/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
- C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
- C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
- C07D405/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Cardiology (AREA)
- Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
- Pulmonology (AREA)
- Neurology (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
- Neurosurgery (AREA)
- Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
- Rheumatology (AREA)
- Oncology (AREA)
- Vascular Medicine (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Psychiatry (AREA)
- Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
- Diabetes (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
Abstract
The invention relates to acylaminopyrazoles and methods for their production, in addition to their use for producing medicaments for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular cardiovascular diseases and preferably thrombo-embolic diseases.
Description
F3HC 06 I 16S-Foreign_Countries GFI~00ti 10 15 ACYLAMINOPYRAZOLES FOR TREATING CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES
The invention relates to acvlaminopyrazoles and to processes for their preparation. and also to their use for preparing medicaments for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular cardiovascular disorders. preferably thromboembolic disorders.
Blood coagulation is a protective mechanism of the organistn which helps to "seal" defects in the wall of the blood vessels quickly and reliably. Thus, loss of blood can be avoided or kept to a minimum. Haemostasis after injury of the blood vessels is effected mainly by the coagulation system in which an enzvmatic cascade of complex reactions of plasma proteins is triggered.
Numerous blood coagulation factors are involved in this process, each of which factors converts, on activation, the respectively next inactive precursor into its active foi-m.
At the end of the cascade comes the conversion of soluble fibrinogen into insoluble fibrin, resulting in the formation of a blood clot. In blood coagulation, traditionally the intrinsic and the extrinsic system, which end in a joint reaction path, are distinguished. Here, the active enzyme factor Xa is formed from the proenzyme factor X. The activated serine protease Xa cleaves prothrombin to thrombin. The resulting thrombin, in turn, cleaves fibrinogen to fibrin. Subsequent crosslinking of the fibrin monomers causes formation of blood clots and thus haemostasis.
In addition, via proteolytic activation of platelet receptors, thrombin is a potent trigger of platelet aggregation, which also makes a major contribution to haemostasis. Further functions of throtnbin which contribute to blood coagulation are the stabilization of the fibrin clot via activation of factor Xlll, potentiation of the coagulation reaction via activation of cofactors V
and VIII and inhibition of fibrinolysis via activation of procarboxypeptidase B (syn. TAFI). Finally, by proteolytic activation of protein C, thrombin can countei-act excessive activity of the coagulation cascade and thus overshooting haemostasis (thrombosis).
Haemostasis is subject to a complex regulatory mechanism. Uncontrolled activation of the coagulant system or defective inhibition of the activation processes may cause formation of local thrombi or embolisms in vessels (arteries, veins, lymph vessels) or in heart cavities. This may lead to serious thromboembolic disorders. In addition, in the case of consumption coagulopathy, hypercoa-ulability may -- systemically - result in disseminated intravascular coagulation.
Thromboembolic complications fur-thermore occur in microangiopathic hemolytic anemias, extracorporeal blood circulation, such as hacmodia!ysis. and also in conneetioii vvith prosthetic heart valves.
Thromboembolic disorders are the most frequent cause of morbidity and mortality in most industrialized counn-ies [1-leart Disease: A 7extbook oi' Cardiovascular Ivledicine. Eugene = BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Braunwald, 5th edition, 1997, W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia].
The anticoagulants, i.e. substances for inhibiting or preventing blood coagulation, which are known from the prior art, have various, often grave disadvantages.
Accordingly, in practice, an efficient treatment or prophylaxis of thromboembolic disorders is very difficult and unsatisfactory (D.A. Lane, et al, Directing Thrombin. Blood 106, 2605-2612, 2005; D.
Gustafsson, et al., Nature Reviews Drug Discovery, 3, 649-659, 2004; L. Wallentin, et al., The Lancet 362, 789-797, 2003).
In the therapy and prophylaxis of thromboembolic disorders, use is firstly made of heparin, which is administered parenterally or subcutaneously. Owing to more favorable pharmacokinetic properties, preference is nowadays more and more given to low-molecular-weight heparin;
however, even with low-molecular-weight heparin, it is not possible to avoid the known disadvantages described below, which are involved in heparin therapy. Thus, heparin is ineffective when administered orally and has a relatively short half-life. Since heparin inhibits a plurality of factors of the blood coagulation cascade at the same time, the action is non-selective. Moreover, there is a high risk of bleeding; in particular, brain hemorrhages and gastrointestinal bleeding may occur, which may result in thrombopenia, drug-induced alopecia or osteoporosis [Pschyrembel, Klinisches W6rterbuch, 257th edition, 1994, Walter de Gruyter Verlag, page 610, entry "Heparin";
Rompp Lexikon Chemie, Version 1.5, 1998, Georg Thieme Verlag Stuttgart, entry "Heparin"].
A second class of anticoagulants are the vitamin K antagonists. These include, for example, 1,3-indanediones, and especially compounds such as warfarin, phenprocoumon, dicumarol and other coumarin derivatives which inhibit the synthesis of various products of certain vitamin K-dependent coagulation factors in the liver in a non-selective manner. Owing to the mechanism of action, however, the onset of the action is very slow (latency to the onset of action 36 to 48 hours).
It is possible to administer the compounds orally; however, owing to the high risk of bleeding and the narrow therapeutic index, a time-consuming individual adjustment and monitoring of the patient are required [J. Hirsh, J. Dalen, D.R. Anderson et al., "Oral anticoagulants: Mechanism of action, clinical effectiveness, and optimal therapeutic range" Chest 2001, 119, 8S-21S; J. Ansell, J. Hirsh, J. Dalen et al., "Managing oral anticoagulant therapy" Chest 2001, 119, 22S-38S;
P.S. Wells, A.M. Holbrook, N.R. Crowther et al., "Interactions of warfarin with drugs and food"
Ann. Intern. Med. 1994, 121, 676-683]. Other side effects such as gastrointestinal problems, hair loss and skin necroses have also been described.
However, during the course of many cardiovascular disorders and metabolic disorders, owing to systemic factors, such as, for example hyperlipidemia, diabetes or smoking, owing to changes in blood flow with stases, such as, for example, in the case of atrial fibrillation, or owing to BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries pathological changes of the walls of the vessels, for example endothelial dysfunction or atherosclerosis, there is an increased tendency of coagulation activation and platelet activation.
This unwanted and excessive haemoastsis may, by formation of fibrin- and platelet-rich thrombi, result in thromboembolic disorders and thrombotic complications with life-threatening states.
Novel approaches toward oral anticoagulants are in various phases of clinical development or clinical use; however, they have also shown disadvantages, such as, for example, highly variable bioavailability, liver damage and bleeding complications.
Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide novel compounds as thrombin inhibitors for the treatment of cardiovascular disorders, in particular thromboembolic disorders, in humans and animals, which compounds have a wide therapeutic spectrum.
The invention relates to acvlaminopyrazoles and to processes for their preparation. and also to their use for preparing medicaments for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular cardiovascular disorders. preferably thromboembolic disorders.
Blood coagulation is a protective mechanism of the organistn which helps to "seal" defects in the wall of the blood vessels quickly and reliably. Thus, loss of blood can be avoided or kept to a minimum. Haemostasis after injury of the blood vessels is effected mainly by the coagulation system in which an enzvmatic cascade of complex reactions of plasma proteins is triggered.
Numerous blood coagulation factors are involved in this process, each of which factors converts, on activation, the respectively next inactive precursor into its active foi-m.
At the end of the cascade comes the conversion of soluble fibrinogen into insoluble fibrin, resulting in the formation of a blood clot. In blood coagulation, traditionally the intrinsic and the extrinsic system, which end in a joint reaction path, are distinguished. Here, the active enzyme factor Xa is formed from the proenzyme factor X. The activated serine protease Xa cleaves prothrombin to thrombin. The resulting thrombin, in turn, cleaves fibrinogen to fibrin. Subsequent crosslinking of the fibrin monomers causes formation of blood clots and thus haemostasis.
In addition, via proteolytic activation of platelet receptors, thrombin is a potent trigger of platelet aggregation, which also makes a major contribution to haemostasis. Further functions of throtnbin which contribute to blood coagulation are the stabilization of the fibrin clot via activation of factor Xlll, potentiation of the coagulation reaction via activation of cofactors V
and VIII and inhibition of fibrinolysis via activation of procarboxypeptidase B (syn. TAFI). Finally, by proteolytic activation of protein C, thrombin can countei-act excessive activity of the coagulation cascade and thus overshooting haemostasis (thrombosis).
Haemostasis is subject to a complex regulatory mechanism. Uncontrolled activation of the coagulant system or defective inhibition of the activation processes may cause formation of local thrombi or embolisms in vessels (arteries, veins, lymph vessels) or in heart cavities. This may lead to serious thromboembolic disorders. In addition, in the case of consumption coagulopathy, hypercoa-ulability may -- systemically - result in disseminated intravascular coagulation.
Thromboembolic complications fur-thermore occur in microangiopathic hemolytic anemias, extracorporeal blood circulation, such as hacmodia!ysis. and also in conneetioii vvith prosthetic heart valves.
Thromboembolic disorders are the most frequent cause of morbidity and mortality in most industrialized counn-ies [1-leart Disease: A 7extbook oi' Cardiovascular Ivledicine. Eugene = BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Braunwald, 5th edition, 1997, W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia].
The anticoagulants, i.e. substances for inhibiting or preventing blood coagulation, which are known from the prior art, have various, often grave disadvantages.
Accordingly, in practice, an efficient treatment or prophylaxis of thromboembolic disorders is very difficult and unsatisfactory (D.A. Lane, et al, Directing Thrombin. Blood 106, 2605-2612, 2005; D.
Gustafsson, et al., Nature Reviews Drug Discovery, 3, 649-659, 2004; L. Wallentin, et al., The Lancet 362, 789-797, 2003).
In the therapy and prophylaxis of thromboembolic disorders, use is firstly made of heparin, which is administered parenterally or subcutaneously. Owing to more favorable pharmacokinetic properties, preference is nowadays more and more given to low-molecular-weight heparin;
however, even with low-molecular-weight heparin, it is not possible to avoid the known disadvantages described below, which are involved in heparin therapy. Thus, heparin is ineffective when administered orally and has a relatively short half-life. Since heparin inhibits a plurality of factors of the blood coagulation cascade at the same time, the action is non-selective. Moreover, there is a high risk of bleeding; in particular, brain hemorrhages and gastrointestinal bleeding may occur, which may result in thrombopenia, drug-induced alopecia or osteoporosis [Pschyrembel, Klinisches W6rterbuch, 257th edition, 1994, Walter de Gruyter Verlag, page 610, entry "Heparin";
Rompp Lexikon Chemie, Version 1.5, 1998, Georg Thieme Verlag Stuttgart, entry "Heparin"].
A second class of anticoagulants are the vitamin K antagonists. These include, for example, 1,3-indanediones, and especially compounds such as warfarin, phenprocoumon, dicumarol and other coumarin derivatives which inhibit the synthesis of various products of certain vitamin K-dependent coagulation factors in the liver in a non-selective manner. Owing to the mechanism of action, however, the onset of the action is very slow (latency to the onset of action 36 to 48 hours).
It is possible to administer the compounds orally; however, owing to the high risk of bleeding and the narrow therapeutic index, a time-consuming individual adjustment and monitoring of the patient are required [J. Hirsh, J. Dalen, D.R. Anderson et al., "Oral anticoagulants: Mechanism of action, clinical effectiveness, and optimal therapeutic range" Chest 2001, 119, 8S-21S; J. Ansell, J. Hirsh, J. Dalen et al., "Managing oral anticoagulant therapy" Chest 2001, 119, 22S-38S;
P.S. Wells, A.M. Holbrook, N.R. Crowther et al., "Interactions of warfarin with drugs and food"
Ann. Intern. Med. 1994, 121, 676-683]. Other side effects such as gastrointestinal problems, hair loss and skin necroses have also been described.
However, during the course of many cardiovascular disorders and metabolic disorders, owing to systemic factors, such as, for example hyperlipidemia, diabetes or smoking, owing to changes in blood flow with stases, such as, for example, in the case of atrial fibrillation, or owing to BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries pathological changes of the walls of the vessels, for example endothelial dysfunction or atherosclerosis, there is an increased tendency of coagulation activation and platelet activation.
This unwanted and excessive haemoastsis may, by formation of fibrin- and platelet-rich thrombi, result in thromboembolic disorders and thrombotic complications with life-threatening states.
Novel approaches toward oral anticoagulants are in various phases of clinical development or clinical use; however, they have also shown disadvantages, such as, for example, highly variable bioavailability, liver damage and bleeding complications.
Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide novel compounds as thrombin inhibitors for the treatment of cardiovascular disorders, in particular thromboembolic disorders, in humans and animals, which compounds have a wide therapeutic spectrum.
4 describes structurally similar pyrazole derivatives and their use for the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders, such as, for example, Alzheimer's disease.
The invention provides compounds of the formula O R H R
R N
H R5 R4 O N-N (I)>
\ R Z
in which Ri represents phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C,-C4-alkyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, C,-Ca-alkylamino, C,-Cq-alkylthio and C,-C4-alkylcarbonyl, R2 represents phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C,-C4-alkyl, C,-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylamino, Ci-C4-alkylthio and Ci-C4-alkylcarbonyl, BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries R' represents hydrogen, R4 represents C,-C6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl or C;-C6-cycloallcyl, where alkyl and alkenyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, Cl-C4-alkylamino and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring or a 1,3-thiazolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring and the 1,3-thiazolidine ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, CI-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, CI-C4-alkoxy and CI-C4-alkylamino, R5 represents hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, amino, CI-C6-alkyl, Ci-C6-alkoxy, Ci-C6-alkylamino, Ci-C6-alkylcarbonyloxy, Ci-C6-alkylcarbonylamino or 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where alkyl and alkylamino may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, hydroxycarbonyl, Cj-C6-alkylamino, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl and 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where heterocyclyl for its part may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, CI-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylamino, Ci-Ca-alkylthio, C,-C4-alkylcarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkylcarbonyl-amino, Cl-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and CI-C4-alkyl-carbonyloxy, and where heterocyclyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries aminocarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy, Ci-C4-alkylamino, Cl-C4-alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, CI -C4-alkylcarbonylamino, CI-C4-alkylamino-carbonyl, CI -C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and C,-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, CX4-alkyl, C,-C4-alkoxy and Ci-C4-alkylamino, R6 represents phenyl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, C3-C6-cycloalkyl or 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, Cl-C4-alkylamino, alkylthio, Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyl, C,-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, C,-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, C,-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, C,-C4-alkylsulfonyl and Cl-C4-alkylsulfinyl, and where cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, ainino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylamino, alkylthio, Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, C,-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries R ' R O *
O
where * indicates the carbon atom to which R5 and R6 are attached, and R7 and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclopentane ring or cyclohexane ring, where the cyclopentane ring and the cyclohexane ring may be substituted by I
to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, Ci-C4-alkyl, Cl-C4-alkoxy ar-d CI-C4-alkylamino, and where R3 and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, and their salts, their solvates and the solvates of their salts.
Compounds according to the invention are the compounds of the formula (1) and their salts, solvates and solvates of the salts, and the compounds, comprised by formula (I), mentioned below as embodiments and their salts, solvates and solvates of the salts if the compounds, comprised by formula (I), mentioned below are not already salts, solvates and solvates of the salts.
Depending on their structure, the compounds according to the invention can exist in stereoisomeric forms (enantiomers, diastereomers). Accordingly, the invention comprises the enantiomers or diastereomers and their respective mixtures. From such mixtures of enantiomers and/or diastereomers, it is possible to isolate the stereoisomerically uniform components in a known manner.
If the compounds according to the invention can be present in tautomeric forms, the present invention comprises all tautomeric forms.
In the context of the present invention, preferred salts are physiologically acceptable salts of the BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries compounds according to the invention. The invention also comprises salts which for their part are not suitable for pharmaceutical applications, but which can be used, for example, for isolating or purifying the compounds according to the invention.
Physiologically acceptable salts of the compounds according to the invention include acid addition salts of mineral acids, carboxylic acids and sulfonic acids, for example salts of hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, naphthalene disulfonic acid, acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, propionic acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid and benzoic acid.
Physiologically acceptable salts of the compounds according to the invention also include salts of customary bases, such as, by way of example and by way of preference, alkali metal salts (for example sodium salts and potassium salts), alkaline earth metal salts (for example calcium salts and magnesium salts) and ammonium salts, derived from ammonia or organic amines having I to 16 carbon atoms, such as, by way of example and by way of preference, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, ethyldiisopropylamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, dimethylaminoethanol, procaine, dibenzylamine, N-methylmorpholine, arginine, lysine, ethylenediamine, N-methylpiperidine and choline.
In the context of the invention, solvates are those forms of the compounds according to the invention which, in solid or liquid state, form a complex by coordination with solvent molecules.
Hydrates are a specific form of the solvates where the coordination is with water.
Moreover, the present invention also comprises prodrugs of the compounds according to the invention. The term "prodrugs" includes compounds which for their part may be biologically active or inactive but which, during the time they spend in the body, are converted into compounds according to the invention (for example metabolically or hydrolytically).
In the context of the present invention, unless specified differently, the substituents have the following meanings:
Alkyl per se and "alk" and "alkyl" in alkoxy, alkylamino, alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl alkylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkylaminocarbonyl, alk lsulfonyl alkylsulfinyl, alkoxycarbonyl and alkoxycarbon lay mino represents a straight-chain or branched alkyl radical having I to 6, preferably I to 4, carbon atoms, by way of example and by way of preference methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl and n-hexyl.
Alkenyl represents a straight-chain or branched alkenyl radical having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Preference is given to a straight-chain or branched alkenyl radical having 2 to 4, particularly preferably 2 or 3, carbon atoms. The following radicals may be mentioned by way of example and by way of preference: vinyl, allyl, n-prop-l-en-1-y) and n-but-2-en-1-yl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkoxy represents methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy and tert-butoxy.
Alkylamino represents an alkylamino radical having one or two alkyl substituents (selected independently of one another), by way of example and by way of preference methylamino, ethylamino, n-propylamino, isopropylamino, tert-butylamino, n-pentylamino, n-hexylamino, N,N-dimethylamino, N,N-diethylamino, N-ethyl-N-methylamino, N-methyl-N-n-propylamino, N-isopropyl-N-n-propylamino, N-tert-butyl-N-methylamino, N-ethyl-N-n-pentylamino and N-n-hexyl-N-methylamino. C,-C3-Alkylamino represents, for example, a monoalkylamino radical having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or represents a dialkylamino radical having in each case I to 3 carbon atoms per alkyl substituent.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylthio represents methylthio, ethylthio, n-propylthio, isopropylthio, tert-butylthio, n-pentylthio and n-hexylthio.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylcarbonyl represents methylcarbonyl, ethylcarbonyl, n-propylcarbonyl, isopropylcarbonyl, n-butylcarbonyl and tert-butylcarbonyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylcarbonylamino represents methylcarbonylamino, ethylcarbonylamino, n-propylcarbonylamino, isopropylcarbonylamino, n-butylcarbonylamino and tert-butylcarbonylamino.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylcarbonyloxy represents methylcarbonyloxy, ethylcarbonyloxy, n-propylcarbonyloxy, isopropylcarbonyloxy, n-butylcarbonyloxy and tert-butylcarbonyloxy.
Alkylaminocarbonyl represents an alkylaminocarbonyl radical having one or two alkyl substituents (selected independently of one another), by way of example and by way of preference methylaminocarbonyl, ethylaminocarbonyl, n-propylaminocarbonyl, isopropylaminocarbonyl, tert-butylaminocarbonyl, n-pentylaminocarbonyl, n-hexylaminocarbonyl, N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl, N,N-diethylaminocarbonyl, N-ethyl-N-methylaminocarbonyl, N-methyl-N-n-propylaminocarbonyl, N-isopropyl-N-n-propylaminocarbonyl, N-tert-butyl-N-methylaminocarbonyl, N-ethyl-N-n-pentylaminocarbonyl and N-n-hexyl-N-methylaminocarbonyl. C,-C3-Alkylaminocarbonyl represents, for example, a monoalkylaminocarbonyl radical having I to 3 carbon atoms or represents a dialkylaminocarbonyl radical having in each case I to 3 carbon atoms per alkyl substituent.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries By way of example and by way of preference, alkylsulfonyl represents methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, n-propylsulfonyl, isopropylsulfonyl, n-butylsulfonyl and tert-butylsulfonyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylsulfinyl represents methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, n-propylsulfinyl, isopropylsulfinyl, n-butylsulfinyl and tert-butylsulfinyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkoxycarbonyl represents methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, n-propoxycarbonyl, isopropoxycarbonyl, n-butoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, n-pentoxycarbonyl and n-hexoxycarbonyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkoxycarbonylamino represents methoxycarbonyl amino, ethoxycarbonylamino, n-propoxycarbonylamino, isopropoxycarbonylamino, n-butoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, n-pentoxycarbonylamino and n-hexoxycarbonyl-amino.
Cycloalkyl represents a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having generally 3 to 6, preferably 3, 5 or 6, carbon atoms, by way of example and by way of preference, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl may be mentioned for cycloalkyl.
Heterocyclyl represents a monocyclic heterocyclic radical having generally 5 to 7, preferably 5 or 6, ring atoms and up to 3, preferably up to 2, heteroatoms and/or hetero groups from the group consisting of N, 0, S, SO, SOz, where a nitrogen atom may also form an N-oxide. The heterocyclyl radicals can be saturated or partially unsaturated. Preference is given to 5-or 6- membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl radicals having up to 2 heteroatoms from the group consisting of 0, N and S, by way of example and by way of preference pyrrolidin-2-yl, pyrrolidin-3-yl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, pyranyl, piperidin-1-yl, piperidin-2-yl, piperidin-3-yl, piperidin-4-yl, thiopyranyl, morpholin-1-yl, morpholin-2-yl, morpholin-3-yl, perhydroazepinyl, piperazin-l-yl and piperazin-2-yl.
Heteroaryl represents an aromatic monocyclic radical having 5 or 6 ring atoms and up to 4, preferably up to 2, heteroatoms from the group consisting of S, 0 and N, where a nitrogen atom may also form an N-oxide, by way of example and by way of preference thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl and pyrazinyl.
Halogen represents fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine, preferably fluorine and chlorine.
If radicals in the compounds of the formula (1), their salts, their solvates or the solvates of their salts are substituted, the radicals can, unless specified otherwise, be mono-or polysubstituted by identical or different substituents. Substitution with up to three identical or different substituents is BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries preferred. Very particular preference is given to substitution with one substituent.
Preference is given to the compounds of the formula (I) in which R' represents phenyl, pyridyl or pyrimidyl, where phenyl, pyridyl and pyrimidyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, CI-C4-alkyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, C,-C4-alkylamino, C,-C4-alkylthio and Ci-C4-alkylcarbonyl, R2 represents phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl or imidazolyl, where phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and imidazolyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethyl, CI-C4-alkyl and CI-Ca-alkoxy, R' represents hydrogen, R4 represents CI-C6-alkyl or C3-C6-cycloalkyl, where alkyl may be substituted with I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, CI-C4-alkoxy, Ci-C4-alkylamino and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of CI-C4-alkyl and CI-C4-alkoxy, R5 represents hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, amino, Ci-C6-alkyl, C,-C6-alkoxy, alkylamino, CI-C6-alkylcarbonyloxy, Ci-C6-alkylcarbonylamino, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl or 4-(CI-C4-alkyl)piperazinyl, where alkyl and alkylamino may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, hydroxycarbonyl, C1-C6-BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries alkylamino, Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl, where pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl for their part may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C]-C4-alkyl and CX4-alkoxy, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of CI-C4-alkyl, R6 represents phenyl, cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl or thiopyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, CI-C4-alkyl, Cl-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, CI-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, and where cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl and thiopyranyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, oxo, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C,-C4-alkyl, C,-C4-alkoxy, C,-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, C I-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and C i-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, or RS and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula R' R8 O
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries where * indicates the carbon atom to which Rs and R6 are attached, and R' and R 8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R' and RS are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, and their salts, their solvates and the solvates of their salts.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I) in which R' represents phenyl or pyridyl, where phenyl and pyridyl may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen and methoxy, R 2 represents phenyl, pyridyl or thienyl, where phenyl and thienyl may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of fluorine, chlorine and bromine, R3 represents hydrogen, R4 represents isopropyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by I or 2 methyl substituents, R5 represents hydrogen, Ci-C4-alkyl or Ci-C4-alkoxy, where alkyl may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries group consisting of hydroxyl, hydroxycarbonyl and C,-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 methyl substituents, R' represents phenyl or 4-pyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl and C,-C4-alkoxy, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula :08*
where * indicates the carbon atom to which R 5 and R6 are attached, and R' and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R' and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, and their salts, their solvates and the solvates of their salts.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (1), in which R' represents phenyl, where phenyl may be substituted by a fluorine substituent.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R 2 represents phenyl or thienyl, where phenyl and thienyl may be substituted by a fluorine or chlorine substituent.
Particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (1), in which R2 represents thienyl, where thienyl may be substituted by a fluorine substituent.
Very particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R 2 represents 5-fluoro-2-thienyl or 5-chloro-2-thienyl.
Very particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R 2 represents 5-fluoro-2-thienyl.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R3 represents hydrogen.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R4 represents isopropyl.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R5 represents hydrogen or C,-C4-alkyl, where alkyl may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl and hydroxycarbonyl.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (1), in which R6 represents phenyl, where phenyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl and C,-C4-alkoxy.
Particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R6 represents phenyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 2 methoxy substituents or one methoxy substituent and one chlorine substituent.
Very particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R6 represents 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl or 3-chloro-4-methoxyphenyl.
The invention furthermore provides a process for preparing the compounds of the formula (I), where according to process [A] a compound of the formula H R~
N
HN
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries in which R', RZ, R' and R4 have the meaning given above, is reacted with a compound of the formula O
AHY' Rs (III), in which R5 and R6 have the meaning given above and YI represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine or iodine, or hydroxyl, or [B] a compound of the formula R' H2N ~ ~ (IV), N-N
R
in which R' and R2 have the meaning given above, is reacted with a compound of the formula N /
H R5 R4 O lV), in which R3, R4, R5 and R6 have the meaning given above and Y2 represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine oder iodine, or hydroxyl.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The reaction according to process [A] and process [B] is, if Y' or YZ is halogen, generally carried out in inert solvents, in the presence of a base, preferably in a temperature range of from 0 C to 40 C at atmospheric pressure.
Inert solvents are, for example, halogenated hydrocarbons, such as methylene chloride, trichloromethane or 1,2-dichloroethane, ethers, such as dioxane, tetrahydrofuran or 1,2-dimethoxyethane, or other solvents, such as acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, 2-butanone or acetonitrile; preference is given to tetrahydrofuran or methylene chloride.
Bases are, for example, alkali metal carbonates, such as cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate or potassium carbonate, or sodium methoxide or potassium methoxide, or sodium ethoxide or potassium ethoxide or potassium tert-butoxide, or amides, such as sodium amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide or lithium diisopropylamide, or other bases, such as sodium hydride, DBU, triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine; preference is given to diisopropylethylamine.
The reaction according to the process [A] and process [B] is, if Y' or Yz is hydroxyl, generally carried out in inert solvents, in the presence of dehydrating agents, if appropriate in the presence of a base, preferably in a temperature range of from 0 C to room temperature at atmospheric pressure.
Suitable dehydrating agents are here, for example, carbodiimides, such as, for example, N,N'-diethyl-, N,N'-dipropyl-, N,N'-diisopropyl-, N,N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, N-(3-dimethylamino-isopropyl)-N'-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC) (if appropriate in the presence of pentafluorophenol (PFP)), N-cyclohexylcarbodiimide-N'-propyloxymethyl-polystyrene (PS-carbodiimide), or carbonyl compounds, such as carbonyldiimidazole, or 1,2-oxazolium compounds, such as 2-ethyl-5-phenyl-l,2-oxazolium 3-sulfate or 2-tert-butyl-5-methylisoxazolium perchlorate, or acylamino compounds, such as 2-ethoxy-l-ethoxycarbonyl-l,2-dihydroquinoline, or propanephosphonic anhydride, or isobutyl chloroformate, or bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphoryl chloride or benzotriazolyloxytri(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate, or O-(benzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HBTU), 2-(2-oxo-1-(2H)-pyridyl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate (TPTU) or O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU), or 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt), or benzotriazol- l -yloxytris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (BOP), or mixtures of these, with bases. The condensation is preferably carried out using HOBt and EDC.
Bases are, for example, alkali metal carbonates, such as, for example, sodium carbonate or potassium carbonate or sodium bicarbonate or potassium bicarbonate, or organic bases, such as trialkylamines, for example triethylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N-methylpiperidine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine or diisopropylethylamine. The condensation is preferably carried out BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries using diisopropylethylamine.
Inert solvents are, for example, halogenated hydrocarbons, such as dichloromethane or trichloromethane, hydrocarbons, such as benzene, nitromethane, dioxane, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile or hexamethylphosphoric triamide. It is also possible to use mixtures of the solvents.
Particular preference is given to dichloromethane or dimethylformamide.
The compounds of the formula (111) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials.
The compounds of the formula (IV) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials. The preparation of the aminoimidazoles is as described, for example, by Cook, et al. J. Chem. Soc., 1949, 1074-1076 and Bador, et al. J.
Chem. Soc., 1950, 2775-2780.
The compounds of the formula (V) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials. Use is made, inter alia, of peptide couplings and alkylations.
The compounds of the formula (II) are known or can be prepared by reacting compounds of the formula H Ri s N
Y
(VI), O N_N
in which R', R 2 and R3 have the meaning given above, and Y3 represents halogen, preferably iodine, bromine or chlorine, with compounds of the formula H2N-R4 (VIl), in which R4 has the meaning given above.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The reaction is generally carried out in inert solvents, in the presence of a base, preferably in a temperature range of from 0 C to 40 C at atmospheric pressure.
Inert solvents are, for example, halogenated hydrocarbons, such as methylene chloride, trichloromethane or 1,2-dichloroethane, ethers, such as dioxane, tetrahydrofuran or 1,2-dimethoxyethane, or other solvents, such as acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, 2-butanone or acetonitrile; preference is given to tetrahydrofuran or methylene chloride.
Bases are, for example, alkali metal carbonates, such as cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate, or sodium methoxide or potassium methoxide, sodium ethoxide or potassium ethoxide or potassium tert-butoxide, or amides, such as sodium amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide or lithium diisopropylamide, or other bases, such as sodium hydride, DBU, triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine; preference is given to diisopropylethylamine.
The compounds of the formula (VII) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials.
The compounds of the formula (VI) are known or can be prepared by reacting compounds of the formula (IV) with compounds of the formula (VI11), in which R3 has the meaning given above, Y3 represents halogen, preferably iodine, bromine or chlorine, and Y4 represents halogen, preferably iodine or bromine, or hydroxyl.
The reaction is carried out according to process [A].
The compounds of the formula (Vlll) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials.
Alternatively to the process described above, the amines (II) can also be prepared by reductive amination of the primary amines using a suitable ketone or aldehyde. Here, the primary amines are obtained by acylation of the aminoimidazoles (IV), where the primary amine function is protected BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries during the acylation with a suitable protective group, such as, for example, a Boc group, which is removed after the reaction under reaction conditions known to the person skilled in the art. Here, preferred acylating agents are the N-protected amino acids, which are activated using a coupling agent.
The preparation of the starting materials and the compounds of the formula (I) can be illustrated by the synthesis scheme below.
Scheme:
N N
R' R~ YN
H N~0 H NO
R NHQ R NHz H3C Rz R 2 R2 \% S O Rz/N\NHz N N / \
0/ 0 RN Ri N Ri N
CN
\I%
NHz HN O HN~O
R Y
1, R
N
Ri H N~O
RS
R' N
The compounds according to the invention have an unforeseeable useful pharmacological and pharmacokinetic activity spectrum. They are compounds which have an effect on the proteolytic activity of the serin protease thrombin. The compounds according to the invention inhibit the enzymatic cleavage of substrates which play an important role in the activation of coagulation and the aggregation of platelets.
Accordingly, they are suitable for use as medicaments for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases in humans and animals.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The present invention furthermore provides the use of the compounds according to the invention for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of disorders, preferably thromboembolic disorders and/or thromboembolic complications.
The "thromboembolic diseases" within the meaning of the present invention in particular include diseases such as acute coronary syndrome (ACS), myocardial infarct with ST
segment elevation (STEMI) and without ST segment elevation (non-STEMI), stable angina pectoris, unstable angina pectoris, reocclusions and restenoses after coronary interventions such as angioplasty, stent implantation or aortocoronary bypass, peripheral arterial occlusive diseases, pulmonary embolisms, venous thromboses, in particular deep vein thromboses and renal vein thromboses, transitory ischemic attacks, and thrombotic and thromboembolic cerebral stroke.
The compounds according to the invention are therefore also suitable for the prevention and treatment of cardiogenic thromboembolisms, such as, for example, cerebral ischemias, stroke and systemic thromboembolisms and ischemias in patients with acute, intermittent or persistent cardiac arrhythmias, such as, for example, atrial fibrillation, and those who are subject to cardioversion, furthermore in the case of patients with heart valve diseases or with artificial heart valves.
Moreover, the compounds according to the invention are suitable for the treatment of disseminated intravasal clotting (DIC).
Thromboembolic complications furthermore occur in microangiopathic hemolytic anemias, extracorporeal blood circulations, such as hemodialysis, and heart valve prostheses.
Moreover, the compounds according to the invention are also suitable for influencing wound healing, for the prophylaxis and/or treatment of atherosclerotic vascular diseases and inflammatory diseases such as rheumatic diseases of the locomotor system, coronary heart diseases, heart failure, hypertension, inflammatory disorders, such as, for example, asthma, inflammatory pulmonary disorders, glomerular nephritis and inflammatory disorders of the intestine, moreover also for the prophylaxis and/or treatment of Alzheimer's disease. Moreover, the compounds according to the invention can be employed for the inhibition of tumor growth and of metastasis formation, in microangiopathies, age-related macular degeneration, diabetic retinopathy, diabetic nephropathy and other microvascular diseases, and for the prevention and treatment of thromboembolic complications, such as, for example, venous thromboembolisms, in tumor patients, in particular those who are subjected to relatively large surgical interventions or chemo-or radiotherapy.
The compounds according to the invention can moreover be employed for the prevention of coagulation ex vivo, e.g. for the preservation of blood and plasma products, for the cleaning/pretreatment of catheters and other medical aids and equipment, for the coating of BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries artificial surfaces of medical aids and equipment employed in vivo or ex vivo or in biological samples which contain blood platelets.
The present invention further relates to the use of the compounds according to the invention for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular of the aforementioned diseases.
The present invention furthermore relates to the use of the compounds according to the invention for the production of a medicament for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular of the aforementioned diseases.
The present invention furthermore relates to a process for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular of the aforementioned diseases, using a therapeutically effective amount of compound according to the invention.
The present invention furthermore relates to medicaments comprising a compound according to the invention and one or more other active substances, in particular for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of the aforementioned diseases. Suitable combination active substances which may be mentioned by way of example and preferably are:
= lipid-lowering agents, in particular HMG-CoA-(3-hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl-coenzyme A)-reductase inhibitors;
= coronary therapeutics/vasodilators, in particular ACE (angiotensin converting enzyme) inhibitors; All (angiotensin 11) receptor antagonists; beta-adrenoceptor antagonists; alpha-l-adrenoceptor antagonists; diuretics; calcium channel blockers; substances which bring about an increase in cyclic guanosine monophosphate (cGMP), such as, for example, stimulators of soluble guanylate cyclase;
= plasminogen activators (thrombolytics/fibrinolytics) and thrombolysis/fibrinolysis-increasing compounds such as inhibitors of the plasminogen activator inhibitor (PAI inhibitors) or inhibitors of the thrombin-activated fibrinolysis inhibitor (TAFI inhibitors);
= substances having anticoagulatory activity (anticoagulants);
= substances inhibiting platelet aggregation (platelet aggregation inhibitors, thrombocyte aggregation inhibitors);
= fibrinogen receptor antagonists (glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa antagonists);
= antiarrhythmics;
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries chemotherapeutics for malignant tumors, such as antimetabolites, alkylating zytostatics, topoisomerase inhibitors, mitose inhibitors and zytostatically active antibiotics, hormones, hormone antagonists, other zytostatics (antibodies, kinase inhibitors, zytokine).
The invention furthermore relates to a method for the prevention of blood coagulation in vitro, in particular in blood preserves or biological samples containing blood platelets, which method is characterized in that an anticoagulatory effective amount of the compound according to the invention is added.
The compounds according to the invention can act systemically and/or locally.
For this purpose, they can be administered in a suitable manner, such as, for example, orally, parenterally, pulmonarily, nasally, sublingually, lingually, buccally, rectally, dermally, transdermally, conjunctivally, otically or as an implant or stent.
For these administration routes, the compounds according to the invention can be administered in suitable administration forms.
For oral administration, administration forms functioning according to the prior art, releasing the compounds according to the invention rapidly and/or in modified form, which contain the compounds according to the invention in crystalline and/or amorphized and/or dissolved form, such as, for example, tablets (noncoated or coated tablets, for example with enteric coatings or coatings which dissolve with a delay or are insoluble, which control the release of the compound according to the invention), tablets disintegrating rapidly in the oral cavity or films/wafers, films/lyophilizates, capsules (for example hard or soft gelatin capsules), coated tablets, granules, pellets, powders, emulsions, suspensions, aerosols or solutions are suitable.
Parenteral administration can take place with circumvention of an absorption step (e.g.
intravenously, intraarterially, intracardially, intraspinally or intralumbarly) or with intervention of an absorption (e.g. intramuscularly, subcutaneously, intracutaneously, percutaneously or intraperitoneally). For parenteral administration, suitable administration forms are, inter alia, injection and infusion preparations in the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsions, lyophilizates or sterile powders.
Preference is given to oral administration.
For the other administration routes, for example, inhalation pharmaceutical forms (inter alia powder inhalers, nebulizers), nose drops, solutions or sprays; tablets to be administered lingually, sublingually or buccally, films/wafers or capsules, suppositories, ear or eye preparations, vaginal capsules, aqueous suspensions (lotions, shake mixtures), lipophilic suspensions, ointments, BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries creams, transdermal therapeutic systems (e.g. patches), milk, pastes, foams, dusting powders, implants or stents are suitable.
The compounds according to the invention can be converted to the administration forms mentioned. This can take place in a manner known per se by mixing with inert, nontoxic, pharmaceutically suitable excipients. These excipients include, inter alia, vehicles (for example microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, mannitol), solvents (e.g. liquid polyethylene glycols), emulsifiers and dispersants or wetting agents (for example sodium dodecylsulfate, polyoxysorbitan oleate), binders (for example polyvinylpyrrolidone), synthetic and natural polymers (for example albumin), stabilizers (e.g. antioxidants such as, for example, ascorbic acid), colorants (e.g.
inorganic pigments such as, for example, iron oxides) and taste and/or odor corrigents.
The present invention furthermore relates to medicaments comprising at least one compound according to the invention, preferably together with one or more inert non-toxic pharmaceutically suitable auxiliaries, and to their use for the purposes mentioned above.
In general, it has proven advantageous in the case of parenteral administration to administer amounts of approximately 5 to 250 mg every 24 hours to achieve effective results. In the case of oral administration, the dose is approximately 5 to 100 mg every 24 hours.
In spite of this, it may optionally be necessary to depart from the amounts mentioned, namely depending on body weight, route of administration, individual behavior toward the medicament, type of preparation and time or interval at which administration takes place.
The percentages in the tests and examples below are, unless indicated otherwise, percentages by weight; parts are parts by weight, solvent ratios, dilution ratios and concentrations of liquid/liquid solutions are in each case based on volume. The term "w/v" means "weight/volume". Thus, for example, "10% w/v" means: 100 ml of solution or suspension comprise 10 g of substance.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries A) Examples Abbreviations:
abs. absolute Boc tert-butoxycarbonyl CDC13 deuterochloroform CO2 carbon dioxide d day DIEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine DMAP 4-N,N-dimethylaminopyridine DMF dimethylformamide DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide oftheory oftheory EDC N'-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N-ethylcarbodiimide x HCI
eq. equivalent ESI electrospray ionization (in MS) sat. saturated H hour HOBt 1-hydroxy-1 H-benzotriazole x H20 HPLC high-pressure, high-performance liquid chromatography conc. concentrated LC-MS liquid chromatography-coupled mass spectrometry min. minutes MS mass spectrometry M W molecular weight [g/mol]
NMR nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy PyBOP 1-benzotriazolyloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate Rf retention index (in TLC) RP-HPLC reversed-phase HPLC
RT room temperature R, retention time (in HPLC) TFA trifluoroacetic acid THF tetrahydrofuran BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries HPLC methods:
Method 1: Instrument: HP 1100 with DAD detection; column: Kromasil RP-18, 60 mm x 2 mm, 3.5 m; mobile phase A: 5 ml of perchloric acid/1 of water, mobile phase B:
acetonitrile; gradient:
0 min 2%B, 0.5 min 2%B, 4.5 min 90%B, 6.5 min 90%B, 6.7 min 2%B, 7.5 min 2%B;
flow rate:
0.75 ml/min; oven: 30 C; UV detection: 210 nm.
Method 2: Instrument: HP 1100 with DAD detection; column: Kromasil RP-18, 60 mm x 2 mm, 3.5 pm; mobile phase A: 5 ml of perchloric acid/1 of water, mobile phase B:
acetonitrile; gradient:
0 min 2%B, 0.5 min 2%B, 4.5 min 90%B, 9 min 90%B, 9.2 min 2%B, 10 min 2%B;
flow rate:
0.75 ml/min; oven: 30 C; UV detection: 210 nm.
LC-MS methods:
Method 1: MS instrument type: Micromass ZQ; HPLC instrument type: Waters Alliance 2795;
column: Phenomenex Synergi 2p hydro-RP Mercury 20 mm x 4 mm; mobile phase A: 1 l of water + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid, mobile phase B: 1 1 of acetonitrile +
0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid; gradient: 0.0 min 90%A 4 2.5 min 30%A 4 3.0 min 5%A 4 4.5 min 5%A; flow rate: 0.0 min I mI/min, 2.5 min/3.0 min/4.5 min 2 ml/min; oven: 50 C; UV
detection: 210 nm.
Method 2: Instrument: Micromass Platform LCZ with HPLC Agilent series 1100;
column:
Thermo Hypersil GOLD 3p 20 imn x 4 mm; mobile phase A: I I of water + 0.5 ml of 50% formic acid, mobile phase B: 1 1 of acetonitrile + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid; gradient: 0.0 min ] 00%A -> 0.2 min 100%A -> 2.9 min 30%A -> 3.1 min 10%A 4 5.5 min 10%A; flow rate:
0.0 min I ml/min, 2.5 min/3.0 min/4.5 min 2 ml/min; oven: 50 C; UV detection:
208-400 nm.
Method 3: Instrument: Micromass Quattro LCZ with HPLC Agilent series 1100;
column:
Phenomenex Gemini 3 30 mm x 3.00 mm; mobile phase A: I I of water + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid, mobile phase B: I I of acetonitrile + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid; gradient:
0.0 min 90%A 4 2.5 min 30%A 4 3.0 min 5%A -> 4.5 min 5%A; flow rate: 0.0 min I
ml/min, 2.5 min/3.0 min/4.5 min 2 ml/min; oven: 50 C; UV detection: 208-400 nm.
Method 4: Instrument: Micromass Quattro LCZ with HPLC Agilent Series 1100;
column:
Phenomenex Onyx Monolithic C18, 100 mm x 3 mm; mobile phase A: 1 I of water +
0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid, mobile phase B: 1 1 of acetonitrile + 0.5 ml of 50%
strength formic acid;
gradient: 0.0 min 90%A 4 2 min 65%A 4 4.5 min 5%A 4 6 min 5%A; flow rate: 2 ml/min;
oven: 40 C; UV detection: 208- 400 nm.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries GC-MS methods:
Method 1: Instrument: Micromass GCT, GC6890; column: Restek RTX-35, 15 m x 200 m x 0.33 m; constant flow of helium: 0.88 ml/min; oven: 70 C; inlet: 250 C;
gradient: 70 C, 30 C/min -> 3 10 C (maintained for 3 min).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Starting materials Example lA
Sodium 2-cyano-2-phenylethenolate +
Na O
N
21.5 g(l84 mmol) of benzyl cyanide are introduced slowly into 135 ml (202 mmol) of a 1.5M
solution of sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide. The mixture is stirred at 10 C
for 30 min, and 14.2 g (193 mmol) of ethyl formate are then added dropwise. A precipitate forms, and after a further 16 h of stirring the precipitate is filtered off, washed with a little tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether and dried under reduced pressure. This gives 28.6 g (93% of theory) of crystals.
LC-MS (method 2): Rt = 2.99 min 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.0 (s, I H), 7.05 (m, 4H), 6.7 (t, I H).
Example 2A
2-Cyano-2-phenylvinyl 4-methyl benzenesulfonate Fi3C
\ ( ~O
/S'~' Q
O
3 5.3 g (185 mmol) of p-toluenesulfonyl chloride are dissolved in 50 ml of toluene, and 29.5 g BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries (176 mmol) of sodium 2-cyano-2-phenylethenolate, dissolved in 200 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, are added dropwise at 20 C. The mixture is stirred at room temperature for a further 2 h and then diluted with 1 1 of water. The mixture is adjusted to an alkaline pH using IN sodium hydroxide solution and extracted three times with in each case 300 ml of dichloromethane. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The oily residue is used without further purification for the subsequent reactions. 9.6 g (18% of theory) of product are obtained.
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 2.81 min Example 3A
1,4-Diphenyl-1 H-pyrazole-3-amine N-N
4.8 g (43.4 mmol) of potassium tert-butoxide are dissolved in 300 ml of anhydrous tetrahydrofuran, and 3.6 g (33.4 mmol) of phenylhydrazine are added at 0 C.
The mixture is stirred at this temperature for a further 10 min, and 10 g (33.4 mmol) of 2-cyano-2-phenylvinyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate are then added a little at a time. Cooling is removed, and the reaction solution is heated gradually to 75 C. At this temperature, it is stirred for a further 5 h. The mixture is allowed to cool, and three quarters of the solvent are distilled off under reduced pressure. The mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed repeatedly with water. The organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by column chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of dichloromethane and methanol. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure.
This gives 3.7 g(41 % of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.15 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 236 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 8.6 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.2 (m, 2H), 5.2 (b, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 4A
2-Chloro-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide H~CI
N N
O
N
330mg (1.4 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazole-3-amine are dissolved in 5 ml of 1,2-dichloroethane and cooled to 0 C. At this temperature, 293 l (2.1 mmol) of triethylamine and 145 l (1.8 mmol) of chloroacetyl chloride are added. Cooling is removed, and the mixture is stirred for a further 2 h. The mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed twice with water, and the organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 191 mg (44% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.40 inin MS (DClpos): m/z = 312 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.4 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.6 (m, 4H), 7.3 (m, 4H), 4.2 (s, 2H).
Example 5A
2-N-(1,4-Diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)-Nz-isopropylglycinamide H3C.
~-CH3 H__(- N
N H
N- O
N
188 mg (0.6 mmol) of 2-chloro-N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide are dissolved in 4 ml of acetonitrile, and 288 mg (4.8 mmol) of isopropylamine are added. The mixture is heated at 50 C
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries for 16 h and then diluted with dichloromethane. The mixture is washed twice with water, and the organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC
using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 140 mg (71 % of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): Rr= 3.97 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 335 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.85 (s, 1H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.6 (m, 4H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.8 (m, ] H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
The aminopyrazoles of the table below are prepared analogously to example 3A.
In example 7A, the starting material used in place of the tosylate is the ethylate.
Example Structure Characterization MS (ES[pos): m/z = 254 (M+H)+
6A N_ HPLC (method 1): R, = 5.70 min.
/
F 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.6 (d, I H), 8.8 (s, I H), 8.1 (d, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.3-7.5 (in, 9H), 7.1 (t, l H).
NHz LC-MS (inethod 3): R, = 2.99 min N-o MS (ESIpos): m/z = 269 (M+H)+
8A N_ NH2 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.62 min.
N
CI 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 8.6 (s, ] H), 7.75 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.1 (t, I H), 5.2 (s, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESIpos): m/z = 237 (M+H)+
9A N N HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.81 min.
U N
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 8.6 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (d, I H), 7.2-7.9 (m, 8H), 5.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 237 (M+H)+
IOA NH2 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.40 min.
N-~ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 9.0 (s, 1 H), 8.7 (s, 1 H), 8.4 (m, 1 H), 8.1 (m, I H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.45 (m, 1 H), 7.4 (t, 2H), 7.2 (t, 1 H), 5.3 (s, 2H).
The chloroacetaminoaminopyrazoles of the table below are prepared analogously to example 4A.
Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 330 (M+H)+
H CI
11A N~ HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.47 min.
N- O
N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 10.3 (s, F 1 H), 8.9 (s, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.3 (t, I H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESipos): m/z = 342 (M+H)+
H--CI
12A N_ O HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.40 min.
N
O 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 10.3 (s, CH 1 H), 8.8 (s, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.5 (m, 4H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 7.0 (d, 2H), 4.3 (s, 2H), 3 .8 (s, 3 H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 346 (M+H)+
H CI
13A N__~- HPLC (method 1): Rt = 4.66 min.
N- O
N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8 = 10.4 (s, CI 1H), 8.9 (s, 1H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.3-7.6 (m, 7H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 313 (M+H)+
14A N~CI HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.15 min.
N O
~ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S = 10.4 (s, ~ 1 H), 8.9 (s, l H), 8.5 (d, 1 H), 8.0 (t, 1 H), 7.9 (d, I H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 3H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 313 (M+H)+
15A N~CI HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.52 min.
N- O
N~ N/ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.4 (s, l H), 9.1 (d, 1 H), 9.0 (s, 1 H), 8.6 (d, 1 H), 8.2 (dd, IH), 7.6 (m, 3H), 7.4 (t, 2H), 7.3 (t, 1H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The 3-[(N-isopropylglycyl)amino]-1-phenyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylates of the table below are prepared analogously to example 5A.
Example Structure Characterization MS (ESIpos): m/z = 353 (M+H)+
16A ~-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.04 min.
H N
N H
N_ p 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.8 \ N/ (s, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, F i 4H), 7.3 (t, 1H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
H3C MS (ESIpos): m/z = 365 (M+H)+
17A H__CN >-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.00 min.
N H
N- 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 8.8 N
(s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.5 (m, 4H), 7.3 (t, CH 1H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 3 2.7 (m, I H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 369 (M+H)+
18A CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.18 min.
~
H N
N H
N_ 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.9 \ N (s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.4-7.8 (m, 6H), 7.3 ci (t, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
MS (ESipos): m/z = 336 (M+H)+
~-CH3 19A HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.77 min.
H N
N H
N_ 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 8.9 N /
~ N (s, 1 H), 8.5 (d, 1 H), 8.0 (t, 1 H), 7.9 (d, ~ 1 H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 3H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 336 (M+H)+
20A ~_CHs HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.20 min.
HN
N H
N_ ~ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 9.1 N/ ~ (d, 1 H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 8.5 (d, 1 H), 8.2 (m, 1 H), 7.6 (m, 3H), 7.4 (t, 2H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
Example 21A
Ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pent-4-enoate 0 \___CH
H3C,o Under an atmosphere of argon, 5.00 g (22.30 mmol) of ethyl (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetate are dissolved in dry tetrahydrofuran and cooled to -78 C. Over a period of 30 min, 28.98 ml (5.32 g, 28.98 mmol) of a I M solution of sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in tetrahydrofuran are added dropwise. By occasional addition of dry tetrahydrofuran, the suspension is kept stirrable. The suspension is stirred at -78 C for I h, and 2.89 ml (4.05 g, 33.44 mmol) of 3-bromoprop-l-ene are then added dropwise. The reaction solution is stirred at -20 C for 2 h, and aqueous saturated ammonium chloride solution, water and a hexane/diethyl ether mixture are then added. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with a hexane/diethyl ether mixture. The combined organic phases are washed with water and aqueous saturated sodium chloride solution.
After drying, the solvent is removed on a rotary evaporator. Without further work-up, 6.33 g (64% of theory) of the desired product are obtained.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.61 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 282 (M+NH4)+
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 6.94-6.68 (m, 3H), 5.78-5.43 (m, 1H), 5.11-4.92 (m, 2H), 4.14-3.95 (m, 2H), 3.78-3.67 (m, 6H), 3.67-3.58 (m, ] H), 2.75-2.32 (m, 2H), 1.17-1.05 (m, 3H).
Example 22A
Ethyl 2-(),4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoate H
~
H3c~ ~ ~~CH3 O
H3C,0 6.33 g(23.95 mmol) of ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pent-4-enoate are dissolved in 67 ml of dry dichloromethane and cooled to -78 C. Ozone is passed through the solution until the starting material has been consumed. Oxygen is then passed through the solution, and 7.03 ml of dimethyl sulfide are added. The reaction inixture is allowed to warm to room temperature overnight and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure in vacuo using a rotary evaporator. The residue is purified by flash chromatography. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 1.48 g(23% of theory) of the desired product.
GC-MS (method 1): R,= 6.83 min GC-MS (method 1) (El): m/z = 266 (M)+
Example 23A
Methyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl]acetate N O
\
A little at a time, 2.85 g (43.56 mmol) of zinc are added to a solution, cooled to 0 C, of 1.16 g (4.36 mmol) of ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoate and 601.6 mg (4.79 mmol) of methyl glycinate hydrochloride in 32.5 ml of glacial acetic acid. The mixture is boiled under reflux BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries for 4 h, and the solution is then allowed to cool. Chloroform is added, the mixture is filtered and the filter cake is washed with ethanol/chloroform (1:1). With gentle heating, the filtrate is concentrated under reduced pressure using a rotary evaporator. The residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate, and the insoluble particles are filtered off. The filtrate is concentrated to dryness with gentle heating under reduced pressure using a rotary evaporator, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography. This gives 900 mg (26% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.49 min MS (ES+): m/z = 294 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 6.93-6.72 (m, 3H), 4.12 (dd, J= 23.0, 17.6 Hz, 2H), 3.76-3.70 (m, 6H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.63-3.40 (m, 3H), 2.50-1.93 (m, 2H, partially obscured by the DMSO
signal).
Example 24A
[3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetic acid O
H3C0 / \ N
~OH
- O
O
912.1 mg (3.11 mmol) of methyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetate are dissolved in 15 ml of tetrahydrofuran, and 15 ml of an aqueous IN lithium hydroxide solution are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3 h and acidified with aqueous 6N
hydrochloric acid, aqueous saturated ainmonium chloride solution is added and the mixture is extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases are dried over sodium sulfate and, under reduced pressure and with gentle heating, evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator.
Without further work-up, 637 mg (73% of theory) of the desired product are obtained.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 3.23 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 297.1 (m+NHq)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 12.87 (br s, 1H), 6.92-6.72 (m, 3H), 4.00 (dd, J= 29.1, 17.6 Hz, 2H), 3.77-3.68 (m, 6H), 3.62-3.38 (m, 3H), 2.49-1.89 (partially obscured by the DMSO signal, m, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 25A
1-Iodoacetone O
I
4.34 ml (5.00 g, 54.04 mmol) of chloroacetone are dissolved in 10 ml of acetone, and 9.87 g (59.44 mmol) of potassium iodide are added. After 1.5 h of stirring at room temperature, the solid is filtered off with suction and washed with acetone. The mother liquor is concentrated to dryness with gentle heating and under a slight vacuum using a rotary evaporator. The residue is reacted further without further purification.
GC-MS (method 1): R, = 2.07 min GC-MS (method 1, El+): m/z = 184.0 (M)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 4.03 (s, 2H), 2.30 (s, 3H).
Example 26A
2-(E/Z)-1-iodoacetone O-benzyl oxime NO
I
8.375 g (45.52 mmol) of 1-iodoacetone and 5.61 g (45.52 mmol) of O-benzylhydroxylamine are dissolved in methanol/water (45 ml/14 ml) and stirred at room temperature for I h. The solvent is concentrated under reduced pressure, using a rotary evaporator, to a volume of 15 ml, and dichloromethane and water are added. The aqueous phase is extracted three times with dichloromethane, and the organic phases are combined. After drying over sodium sulfate, the solvent is removed and the residue is purified by flash chromatography. This gives 8.88 g (65% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.85 and 4.95 min MS (ES+): m/z = 290 (M+H)+
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6, isomer mixture): S= 7.42-7.42 (m, 10H), 5.10 (s, 2H), 5.06 (s, 2H), 4.00 (s, 2H), 3.90 (s, 2H), 1.95 (s, 3H), 1.93 (s, 3H).
Example 27A
Ethyl 4-(E/Z)-4-[(benzyloxy)imino]-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pentanoate N~O
O
O
Under an atmosphere of argon, 4.50 ml (0.96 g, 8.99 mmol) of a 2M solution of lithium diisopropylamide in tetrahydrofuran are added dropwise to a solution, cooled to -78 C, of 1.55 mg (6.92 mmol) of ethyl 3,4-dimethoxyphenylacetate in 40 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran. The solution is allowed to warm to room temperature and then once more cooled to -78 C. A
solution of 2.00 g (6.92 mmol) of 2-(E/Z)-]-iodoacetone O-benzy] oxime in 9 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran is added dropwise, and the mixture is once more allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred under reflux for I h. The solvent is then removed, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography.
The product fractions are combined and dried under reduced pressure. This gives 2.10 g (65% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.87 and 4.97 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 386 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6, isomer mixture): S= 7.39-7.22 (m, 5H), 6.92-6.65 (m, 3H), 5.01-4.91 (m, 2H), 4.12-3.82 (m, 3H), 3.74-3.63 (m, 6H), 2.99-2.76 (m, 1H), 2.56-2.44 (m, 1H, obscured by the DMSO signal), 1.83-1.59 (m, 3H), 1.16-1.04 (m, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 28A
3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methylpyrrolidin-2-one O ~ O
1 ~ 1HNH
O
500 mg (1.30 mmol) of ethyl-4-(E/Z)-4-[(benzyloxy)imino]-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pentanoate are dissolved in 300 ml of methanol, and 1.52 g of a 50% strength Raney nickel suspension in water are added. The reaction suspension is hydrogenated at 2.5 bar and room temperature overnight. The catalyst is removed by filtration through Celite , and the solution is evaporated to dryness. The residue is separated by preparative HPLC, and the product fractions are combined.
Drying under high vacuum gives 204 mg (67% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 3.37 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 236 (M+H)+
I H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 7.83 (s, 1H), 6.91-6.69 (m, 3H), 3.75-3.69 (m, 6H), 3.67-3.46 (m, 2H), 2.60-2.45 (m, I H obscured by the DMSO signal), 2.28-1.98 (m, l H), 1.17 (t, J= 5.9 Hz, 3H).
Example 29A
tert-Butyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetate O O
N ~O CH3 OOH~
Under an atmosphere of argon, 289.0 mg (1.23 mmol) of 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-methylpyrrolidin-2-one are dissolved in dry 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, and 58.95 mg (1.47 mmol) of a 60% strength sodium hydride suspension are added. After 10 min of stirring at room temperature, 362.75 pl (479.19 mg, 2.46 mmol) of tert-butyl bromoacetate are added. A strongly BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries exothermic reaction sets in. After a further 20 min at room temperature, the reaction is quenched with water, and the reaction mixture is separated without further work-up by preparative HPLC.
The product fractions are combined, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure with gentle heating. This gives 147 mg (34% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.27 min MS (ES+): m/z = 350.0 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 6.92-6.71 (m, 3H), 4.15-3.99 (m, IH), 3.89-3.54 (m, 9H), 2.68-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H), 1.25-1.15 (m, 3H).
Example 30A
3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl]acetic acid O
1 ~ N
O OH
270 mg (0.77 mmol) of tert-butyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl]acetate are dissolved in 7.5 ml of a 4M solution of hydrogen chloride in dioxane/water and stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h. The solution is concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure with gentle warming using a rotary evaporator, and the residue is dissolved in 2 ml of water and 10 ml of ethyl acetate. The solution is stirred vigorously for 5 min. The solution is dried on an EXtrelut -NT3 column, and the column is repeatedly washed with ethyl acetate. The solution is concentrated under reduced pressure in vacuo and with gentle heating using a rotary evaporator. Without further work-up, 205 mg (78% of theory) of product are obtained.
HPLC (method 1): Rr= 3.41 min MS (ES-): m/z = 292.1 (M-H)-'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.71 (br s, I H), 6.94-6.68 (m, 3H), 4.24-3.43 (m, l OH), 2.70-1.49 (m, 2H), 1.30-1.12 (m,3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 31A
4-tert-Butyl 1-ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)succinate O
O
O O
H3c-x H3C C;H3 Under an atmosphere of argon, 28.98 ml (10.63 g, 57.97 mmol) of a 2M solution of sodium hexamethylenedisilazane in tetrahydrofuran are added dropwise to a solution, cooled to -78 C, of 10.0 g (44.59 mmol) of ethyl (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetate in 50 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran. To avoid solidification of the reaction solution, a further 30 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at -78 C for I h, and 9.88 ml (13.05 g, 66.89 mmol) of tert-butyl bromoacetate are then added. The solution is stirred at -20 C for 2 h and then warmed to room temperature overnight. A saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution, water and a 1:1 mixture of hexane and diethyl ether are then added. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with 1:1 hexane/diethyl ether. The combined organic phases are washed successively with water and aqueous saturated sodium chloride solution, dried, filtered and then evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure using a rotary evaporator. The residue is separated by flash chromatography. The product fractions are combined, the solvent is removed and the residue is dried under high vacuum.
This gives 13.7 g(73% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.72 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 356 (M+NH4)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 6.92-6.73 (m, 3H), 4.11-3.97 (m, 2H), 3.92-3.84 (m, IH), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 2.98-2.87 (m, IH), 2.59-2.51 (m, 1H, obscured by the DMSO signal), 1.37 (s, 9H), 1.13 (t, J= 7.1 Hz, 3 H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 32A
4-tert-Butoxy-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid H 3 c p OH
iC O
4.0 g(11.82 mmol) of 4-tert-butyl I-ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)succinate are dissolved in 2.1 ml of methanol, and a solution of 82.92 mg (1.48 mmol) of potassium hydroxide in 2.1 ml of water is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight and then carefully neutralized using a 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid solution and diluted with an aqueous saturated ammonium chloride solution. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases are dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. Without further work-up, 376 mg (quantitative yield) of the desired product are obtained.
MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 328 (M+NH4)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.31 (br s, 1 H), 6.95-6.73 (m, 3H), 3.86-3.76 (m, l H), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 3.00-3.82 (m, 1 H), 2.57-2.45 (m, I H, obscured by the DMSO signal), 1.36 (s, 9H).
Example 33A
Ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl) -')-hydroxypropanoate O
O
H3C-O 0 \-CH3 4.0 g (13.4 mmol) of ethyl (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetate and 422 mg (13.4 mmol) of aqueous formaldehyde are dissolved in 13 ml of dimethylsulfonamide. 262 mg (0.77 mmol) of sodium ethoxide are added as a 20 percent by weight strength solution in ethanol.
After 30 min, acetic acid BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries is added until the mixture is acidic, and the mixture is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 1.9 g (56% of theory) of the product.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 6.9 (m, 2H), 6.8 (m, 1H), 5.0 (t, 1H), 4.1 (m, 2H), 3.9 (m, IH), 3.7 (d, 6H), 3.6 (m, 1H), 3.55 (m, 1H), 1.2 (t, 3H).
Example 34A
2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-3-hydroxypropanoic acid O
OH
300 mg (1.18 mmol) of ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-3-hydroxypropanoate are dissolved in 2 ml of a mixture of acetone and water, and 34 mg (1.42 mmol) of lithium hydroxide are added. The mixture is stirred at 50 C for I h, and another 8 mg (0.33 mmol) of lithium hydroxide are then added. After a further hour at 50 C, the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and acidified with dilute hydrochloric acid until it gives an acidic reaction. The organic phase is washed two more times with dilute hydrochloric acid and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 131 mg (49% of theory) of product.
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 244 (M+NH4)+
HPLC (method 1): R, = 2.83 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 12.3 (b, 1 H), 6.9 (m, 2H), 6.8 (m, 1 H), 4.6 (b, l H), 3.9 (t l H), 3.7 (d, 6H), 3 .5 (m, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 35A
4-{[tert-Butyl(dimethyl)silyl]oxy}-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)butanoic acid O-Si\ CH3 OH
500 mg (2.55 mmol) of (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetic acid are dissolved in 25 ml of anhydrous tetrahydrofuran and cooled to -78 C. At this temperature, 1.17 g(6.37 mmol) of sodium hexamethylenedisilazane are added as a I M solution in tetrahydrofuran over a period of 10 min.
After the addition has ended, 670 mg (2.8 mmol) of 2-(bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane are added and the mixture is stirred at this temperature for a further 30 min, before cooling is removed.
After a further 16 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and acidified with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution until it gives an acidic reaction. The organic phase is washed two more times with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 361 mg (40% of theory) of product.
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 355 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.95 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.2 (b, IH), 6.9 (d, I H), 6.8 (m, 2H), 3.7 (s, 6H), 3.5 (m, 3H), 2.6 (s, 6H), 2.2 (m, I H), 1.8 (m, I H), 0.9 (s, 9H).
Example 36A
2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)pent-4-enoic acid CHZ
O
OH
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 5.0 g (25.5 mmol) of (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetic acid are dissolved in 250 ml of anhydrous tetrahydrofuran and cooled to -78 C. At this temperature, 11.7 g(63.7 mmol) of sodium hexamethylenedisilazane, as a 1M solution in tetrahydrofuran, are added over a period of 10 min.
After the addition has ended, 3.4 g (28.0 mmol) of allyl bromide are added and the mixture is stirred at this temperature for a further 30 min, before cooling is removed.
After a further 16 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and acidified with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution until it gives an acidic reaction. The organic phase is washed two more times with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure.
The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 4.7 g (78% of theory) of product.
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 254 (M+NH4)+
HPLC (method 1): Rr = 3.85 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 12.2 (b, IH), 6.9 (m, 2H), 6.8 (m, 1H), 5.7 (m, 1H), 5.0 (m, 2H), 3.7 (d, 6H), 3.5 (t, l H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 2.4 (m, 1 H).
Example 37A
tert-Butyl 3-{2-[{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}(isopropyl)amino]-2-oxoethyl } piperidine- l -carboxylate O ~ /
H 3C ~N N~ ~ ~
C H 3 O HC CH ~ N
N
120 mg (0.36 mmol) of2-N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-NZ-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 5 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 96 mg (0.4 mmol) of 1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidin-3-yl]acetic acid, 5.5 mg (0.04 mmol) of 1-hydroxy-lH-benzotriazole and 76 mg (0.4 mmol) of l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride are added. The reaction solution is BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC
using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 186 mg (92% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 5.04 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 560 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.8-10.2 (m, 1 H), 8.9 (b, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.2-7.7 (m, 8H), 3.6-4.6 (m, 5H), 0.9-2.9 (m, 23H).
Example 38A
tert-Butyl (2R)-2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-l-carboxylate ~-CH3 O
O
N p C>_~
NH
N-N ~ \\
lo 103 mg (0.44 mmol) of l,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazole-3-amine and 94 mg (0.44 mmol) of 1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-D-proline are dissolved in 4 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 381 pl of diisopropylethylamine and 250 mg (0.66 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, giving 61 mg (32%
of theory) of product.
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 433 (M+H)+
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 3.74 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 10.0 (d, I H), 8.7 (s, I H), 7.2-7.8 (m, I OH), 4.2-4,4 (m, 2H), BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 3.2 -3.4 (m, 2H), 2.1-2.3 (m, lH),1.8-2.0 (m, 2H)1.3-1.5 (m, 9H).
Example 39A
tert-Butyl (4S)-4-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)carbamoyl]-1,3-thiazolidine-3-carboxylate H 3C _~-CH
O
O
N O
S '-/`~
NH
N-N ~ \\
50 mg (0.21 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-amine and 50 mg (0.21 mmol) of (R)-N-(t-butylcarbonyl)thiazolidine-4-carboxylic acid are dissolved in 5 ml of dichloromethane, and 185 pi of diisopropylethylamine and 121 mg (0.32 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, giving 29 mg (30%
of theory) of product.
MS (ESipos): m/z = 451 (M+H)+
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 3.82 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 10.1 (b, IH), 8.8 (s, IH), 7.2-7.8 (m, IOH), 4.6-4,8 (m, IH), 4.6 (d, l H), 4.4 (d, 1 H), 4.6 (d, 1 H), 3.4-3.6 (m, 2H), 1.4-1.5 (b, 9H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 40A
Methoxy(4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid H3C.\ _ O-CH3 O
O
HO
2 g (14.7 mmol) of 4-methoxybenzaldehyde are dissolved in 10 ml of methanol, and 4.5 g (17.6 mmol) of bromoform are added. A solution of 4.1 g (73.4 mmol) of potassium hydroxide in ml of methanol is added dropwise to this solution such that the temperature of the reaction mixture does not exceed 5 C. After the addition has ended, cooling is removed and the mixture is stirred for a further 16 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with 30 ml of water and extracted with dichloromethane. The aqueous phase is adjusted to an acidic pH and likewise extracted repeatedly 10 with dichloromethane. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of water and acetonitrile.
The product-containing fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 2.3 g (82% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method l): R,= 3.31 min MS (DClpos): mlz = 151 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 12.8 (b, 1 H), 7.3 (d, 2H), 6.9 (d, 2H), 4.7 (s, IH), 3.7 (s, 3H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
The phenylacetic acids of the table below are prepared analogously to example 24A.
Example Structure Characterization MS (EStneg): m/z = 229 (M-H)-CI
41A H3C \ O-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.70 min.
O
0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.8 (b, HO 1 H), 7.4 (s, 1 H), 6.8 (d, l H), 7.15 (d, 1 H), 4.7 (s, I H), 3 .9 (s, 3H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESIpos): m/z = 244 (M+H)+
42A 0 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.12 min.
H3C\ - O-CH3 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 12.8 (b, HO 1H),6.9(m,3H),4.7(s, 1H),3.8(s,3H),3.3 (s, 3H).
MS (ESipos): m/z = 202 (M+H)+
43A - O-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.38 min.
F \ /
O 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.9 (b, HO
1 H), 7.45 (m, 2H), 7,2 (m, 2H), 4.8 (s, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
MS (ESIneg): m/z = 199 (M-H)-44A HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.71 min.
O
HO 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 12.9 (b, 1 H), 7.4 (q, 4H), 4.8 (s, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
Example 45A
(2R)-1-tert-Butyl 2-methyl 5-methoxypyrrol idine-1,2-dicarboxylate H3CII~ 0 N OCH
O OO
H3C~-CH3 8.20 g(35.8 mmol) of Boc-D-proline methyl ester are dissolved in 70 ml of methanol, 1.00 g (3.3 mmol) of tetraethylammonium para-toluenesulfonate is added and the mixture is, in a jacketed electrochemical cell with argon as protective gas, cooled to 5 C
using a circulation BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries cryostat. The cell is provided with two graphite electrodes (dimensions about 1.0 x 1.0 x 0.25 cm) which are positioned at a distance to one another of about 2 cm. For 20 h, a constant current of about 250 mA (about 5F/mol) is passed through these electrodes. The reaction solution is introduced into 500 ml of diethyl ether, whereupon the conducting salt precipitates as an oil and can be removed. The organic phase is washed with water and saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. This gives 9.00 g (97% of theory) of crude product which is used without further purification in the next step.
GC-MS (method 1): R,= 5.05 min; m/z = 158 (M-Boc+H)+.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 4.15-4.02 (m, 3H), 3.87-3.76 (m, 1H), 2.30-2.20 (m, 1H), 2.06-1.90 (m, IH), 1.90-1.76 (m, 1H), 1.42-1.30 (m, 9H), 1.21-0.95 (m, 6H).
Example 46A
(2R,5S)-l -tert-Butyl 2-methyl 5-methylpyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate " " "'' ON, H
3C N lfr CH 3 H I~ 3\i -~-CH3 In an apparatus which has been dried by heating, under an atmosphere of argon, 12.62 g (61.4 mmol) of copper bromide/dimethyl sulfide complex are initially charged in 225 ml of absolute diethyl ether, and the mixture is cooled to -50 C. 38.0 ml of methyllithium (60.8 mmol, 1.6 molar solution diethyl ether) are then added dropwise. The mixture is stirred at -45 C to -35 C
for 30 min, and 9.75 ml (92.1 mmol) of boron trifluoride diethyl etherate are then added dropwise.
The mixture is stirred at -45 C for a further 15 min, and 9.00 g (34.7 mmol) of (2R)-1-tert-butyl 2-methyl 5-methoxypyrrolidine-l,2-dicarboxylate are then added dropwise. The reaction solution is slowly thawed overnight. 60 ml of conc. ammonia solution are added, and the reaction mixture is stirred for a further 30 min. The reaction mixture is filtered through Kieselgur, the filter cake is washed with dichloromethane and the phases of the combined filtrates are separated. The organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The product is separated on silica gel using cyclohexane/ethyl acetate 6/1. This gives 53 g (62% of theory) of considerably diastereomerically enriched (dr z 9:1) product.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries LC-MS (method 2): R,= 3.51 min; m/z = 144 (M-Boc+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 4.22-4.15 (m, 1 H), 4.02-3.87 (m, I H), 3.67-3.58 (m, 3 H), 2.36-2.19 (m, 1 H), 2.05-1.88 (m, 1 H), 1.87-1.75 (m, I H), 1.57-1.45 (m, 1 H), 1.44-1.29 (m, 9 H), 1.13-1.06 (m, 3 H) Example 47A
(2R, 5S)-1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl )-5-methy lpro l i ne .'0 ',, OH
H 3C N ~
H3C~-CH3 In 40 ml of water/dioxane (1/1), 2.72 g (64.7 mmol) of lithium hydroxide monohydrate are added to 5.25 g (21.6 mmol) of (2R,5S)-1-tert-butyl 2-methyl 5-methylpyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate, and the mixture is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure, and 50 ml of saturated ammonium chloride solution are added. The pH is carefully adjusted to 2-3 using dilute hydrochloric acid, and the mixture is extracted three times with in each case 50 ml of ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. Evaporation gives 4.50 g (89%
of theory) of (2R,5S)-1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-5-methylproline in a diastereomer ratio of dr = 9:1.
LC-MS (method 2): R,= 3.06 min; m/z - 228.0 (M-H)+.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-db): 8= 4.23-4.14 (m, I H), 4.03-3.86 (m, I H), 3.35-3.31 (s, I H), 2.37-2.18 (m, I H), 2.04-1.90 (m, I H), 1.87-1.74 (m, I H), 1.58-1.46 (m, I
H), 1.43-1.28 (m, 9 H), 1.13-1.07 (m, 3 H).
BHC 06 1 l 68-Foreign Countries Example 48A
tert-Butyl (2R,5S)-2-{[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-l-phenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl]carbamoyl}-methylpyrrolidine-l-carboxylate F
H
N
H N ''r CH
209 mg (0.910 mmol) of example 47A and 242 mg (0.827 mmol) of example I lA are dissolved in ml of dichloromethane, and 472 mg (1.241 mmol) of HATU and 0.43 ml (2.482 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine are added. The mixture is stirred in a microwave oven at 80 C for 3 h, and the reaction solution is then purified directly chromatographically by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to 10 dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 43 mg (10% of theory) of product..
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 2.44 min; m/z = 465.4 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 10.0 (b, IH), 8.8 (b, 1H), 7.5-7.6 (m, 4H), 7.1-7.4 (m, 3H), 4.3 (dd, 1H), 3.9-4.0 (m, 1H), 1.4-2.3 (m, 4H), 1.4 (b, 9H), 1.1-1.2 (m, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 49A
tert-Butyl (2R,5S)-2-{[1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl]carbamoyl}-5-methylpyrrolidine-1-carboxylate \
/
H
N
H N 'I I
~O D N-N
O
369 mg (1.57 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-IH-pyrazole-3-amine and 359 mg (1.57 mmol) of (2R,5S)-1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-5-methylproline are dissolved in 15 ml of dichloromethane, and 819 pl of diisopropylethylamine and 894 mg (2.35 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate are added. The reaction mixture is stirred in a pressure-proof glass vial in a microwave oven at 80 C for 60 minutes and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, giving 178 mg (24% of theory) of product.
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 447 (M+H)+
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 3.90 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.07-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.8 (s, IH), 7.91-7.81 (m, 2H), 7.62-7.18 (m, 7H), 4.41-4.26 (m, 1 H), 4.03-3.85 (m, l H), 2.39-1.8 (m, 3H), 1.55-1.46 (m, l H), 1.43-1.33 (br, 9H), 1.3-1.04 (m, 4H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Exemplary embodiments Example 1 NZ [(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)acetyl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-l H-pyrazol-3-yl)-NZ-isopropylglycinamide I \
o ~
~ I 0 H
H3C"
p \ NN ~ NH
60 mg (0.18 mmol) of 2-N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 3 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 40 mg (0.2 mmol) of 3,4-dimethoxyphenylacetic acid, 2.4 mg (0.02 mmol) of 1-hydroxy-1 H-benzotriazole and 38 mg (0.2 mmol) of 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride are added. The reaction solution is stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC
using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 84 mg (92% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.56 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 513 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): b= 10.0 (b, IH), 8.9 (b, IH), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.5-7.7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.6-6.9 (m, 3H), 3.4-4.6 (m, I IH), 1.0 (b, 6H).
The examples of the table below are prepared analogously to Example 1 using the suitable amine and the suitable carboxylic acid. Also suitable for use as coupling agents are N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[ 1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methyl-methanaminium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) or (1H-benzotriazol-l-yloxy)(tripyrrolidin-l-yl)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization O-CH MS (ESIpos): m/z = 557 (M+H)+
CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.62 min.
O O /
H
H3C' 0 N~^yN
CH b'J"CHO N-N
~ MS (ESlpos): m/z = 527 (M+H)+
H3C.10 0 H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.73 min.
H3C, 0 N^ /N
TI I( 3 CH O NI~ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO db): S=
H3b CH3 N
10.0 (s, l H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.8 (m, 2H), \/ 7.7 (d, 1H), 7.5 (m, 3H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.8 (m, 3H), 3.8-4.6 (m, 4H), 3.7 (s, 6H), 0.6-1.4 (m, 9H).
MS ( ESlpos): m/z = 547 (M+H)+
I
u O H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.77 min.
CH3 R~\
CI N~N 4 ~O ~ O _N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
H3C H3C CH3 10.0 (s, 1H), 8.9 (s, 1H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.1-7.7 (m, 11H), 4.0-5.2 (m, 4H), 3.7(s,3H),33(s,3H),0.6-1.1 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization p~CH MS (ESIpos): m/z = 573 (M+H)+
oH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.45 min.
O ~
H3C\ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 ~ I~ 10.0 (s, I H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), H3C "0 H3C ^CH~ N-N
7.5-7.7 (m, 4H), 7.3 (q, 1 H), 6.8-7.0 (m, 5H), 3.0-5.1 (m, 16H), 0.8-1.1 (m, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 497 (M+H)+
H3C.10 \
~ H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.92 min.
HC / NN \
6 ~ O NI~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
H3C C H 10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (s, IH), 6.8-7.9 (m, 12H), 3.4-4.7 (m, 8H), 2.1 (s, 3H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
SIpos): m/z = 517 (M+H)+
i H3 R~\ MS (E
~
N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.77 min.
K
CI ~~ 7 H C CH~ N-N 'H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO d6): 8=
3 3 10.0 (s, IH), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.0-7.9 (m, 13H), 3.4-4.7 (m, 8H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
~ MS (ESlpos): m/z = 542 (M+H)+
H3C ~ 1)--r H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.54 min.
H3C' C N^ /N
8 /O ~ ~IOI( N~\
N
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 513 (M+H)+
H3C'0 IC O N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.70 min.
N
9 ~O 0 NI-CH3 R~\ MS (ESlpos): m/z 499 (M+H)+
/ O \ I N HPLC (method 1): R, 4.38 min.
HO N~ 10 O _N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6=
H3C CH3 10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.0-7.9 (m, l) H), 3.4-4.7 (m, 8H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 528 (M+H)+
H3C- 0 Klr C H HPLC (method l): R, = 4.03 min.
H3C~O N~N
ll CH3 ~ o NI~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
10.0 (s, I H), 9.2 (s, I H), 8.9 (s, I H), N 8.6 (m, l H), 8.2 (m, 1 H), 7.7 (d, l H)>
7.6 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 3H), 6.7-6.9 (m, 3H), 4.7-4.7 (m, 4H), 3.7 (s, 6H), 0.9-1.4 (m, 9H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 531 (M+H)+
H3C~0 ~
H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.61 min.
H3C' 0 N N
12 ~O NI~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6=
10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.5-7.7 (dd, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 5H), 6.6-6.9 (m, 3H), 3.4-4.6 (m, l 1 H), F
1.0 (b, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Forei~n Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESipos): m/z = 515 (M+H)+
O
H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.68 min.
N
O
13 H3CCH0 N,N
O
MS (ESlpos): m/z 561 (M+H)+
3H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.57 min.
H3C, 0 N~N
R,\
14 O ~ O H3C H3C CH3 N
F
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 544 (M+H)+
H3C I O H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.32 min.
H3C, N
0 N 15 O Jl TIOIf NN
cII) MS (ESipos): m/z = 501 (M+H)+
O /
H N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.54 min.
N
O
16 H3C1-1~ CH0 NN
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization - MS (ESIpos): m/z = 501 (M+H)+
H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.80 min.
F 10-i O ~ /
N^ N
17 ~0 /" OIf NI N
\
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 514 (M+H)+
H3C K)-"A O H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.35 min.
H3C'0 N_~,-yN
18 O N~\
bN-CH O'CH3 MS (ESIpos): m/z = 483 (M+H)+
H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.76 min.
N N
19 ~
\
H3C " H3CCH~ N~N
~
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 514 (M+H)+
H3C~ O
H HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.90 min.
H3C,0 N^ N
20 ~OIf N_ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
b1\ 10.0 (s, 1 H), 9.1 (s, I H), 9.0 (s, I H), N 8.5 (m, I H), 8.2 (m, 1 H), 7.5-7.7 (m, 3H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 3H), 6.6-6.9 (m, H), 3.5-4.6 (m, 11 H), 1.0 (b, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 517 (M+H)+
CI lc~ ~ HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.98 min.
N
21 O ~ O NN
H3C~ H 3 C CH3 MS (ESIpos): m/z = 475 (M+H)+
O
N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.45 min.
N
~ MS (ESIpos): m/z = 544 (M+H)+
H3C I O H HPLC (method 1): Rt = 3.87 min.
H3C, N
0 N^
23 'OO N~ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8 H =
~ 12.6-12.8 (m, I H), 9.6-9.9 (m, 1 H), \/ N 7.6-7.8 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.5-6.9 9 (m, 4H), 3.6-4.8 (m, l 1 H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 521 (M+H)+
CI /
~ O H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 5.03 min.
CI \ N N
b BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 475 (M+H)+
~ ~ H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.40 min.
N N
H3~L CH3 -N
b CH3 MS (ESIpos): m/z = 483 (M+H)+
H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.75 min.
H3C~0 N ^I{ /N
26 O ~IO NI~
H3C~ H3C CH3 N
LC-MS (method 1): R, = 1.97 min O
H
N
~
27 O N_ $H3CI CH3 N
6______N
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 28 N-(1,4-Diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropyl-N2-(piperidin-3-ylacetyl)glycinamide O R--100 mg (0.18 mmol) of tert-butyl3-{2-[{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}-(isopropyl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}piperidine-l-carboxylate are dissolved in 4 ml of dichloromethane and 407 mg (3.57 mmol) of trifluoroacetic acid are added a little at a time.
After 2 h, the mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed repeatedly with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, and the organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 80 mg (97% of theory) of product.
LC-MS (method 1): R, = 1.47 min 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.8-10.2 (m, 1H), 8.9 (b, 1H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.2-7.7 (m, 9H), 3.8-4.6 (m, 4H), 0.9-3.4 (m, 16H).
Example 29 2-[3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide ~
~ I
H3 c N L/JN
0 N_N
O
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 115 mg (0.41 mmol) of [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetic acid, 116.26mg (0.49 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazole-3-amine and 215.2 l (159.65 mg, 1.24 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine are dissolved in 4.2 ml of dry dichloromethane. 321.41 mg (0.62 mmol) of PYBOP are added, and the mixture is stirred at a bath temperature of 65 C
overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture is concentrated using a rotary evaporator, dissolved in water and acetonitrile and purified by preparative HPLC. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 78 mg (38% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 2): Rt= 4.35 min MS (ES+): m/z = 497 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 10.13 (br s, 1 H), 8.88 (s, 1 H), 7.94-6.70 (m, 13H), 4.26-4.01 (m, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.67 (s, 3H), 3.65-3.40 (m, 3H), 2.50-2.38 (m, 1H), 2.05-1.90 (m, 1H).
Example 30 2-[3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide i ~ I
O
O N-N
100mg (0.34 mmol) of 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetic acid, 106.95 mg (0.41 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-amine and 178.15 pl (132.19 mg, 1.02 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine are dissolved in 3.5 ml of dry dichloromethane.
266.12 mg (0.51 mmol) of PYBOP are added, and the mixture is stirred at a bath temperature of 65 C overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture is concentrated using a rotary evaporator, coevaporated with toluene, dissolved in water and acetonitrile and purified by preparative HPLC.
The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 30 mg (17% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.37 min BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries MS (ES+): m/z = 511 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.9 (b, I H), 8.0 (s, I H), 7.65 (d, 2H), 7.2-7.5 (m, 8H), 6.8 (m, 3H), 4.15-4.4 (b, IH), 4.0 (b, IH), 3.7-3.9 (m, 5H), 2.7 (m, IH), 2.4 (b, IH), 2.2 (b, IH), 1.7 (b, 2H), 1.3 (m, 3H).
Example 31 tert-Butyl 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-[ { 2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3 -yl )am i no]-2-oxoethyl }-(isopropyl)amino]-4-oxobutanoate H3c" o H3c/o o \ I N
N~
O H3CCH O N,N
H3c o b ~
CH3 250.0 mg (0.75 mmol) ofN-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 3.5 ml of dry N,N-dimethylformamide, and 255.20 mg (0.82 mmol) of 4-tert-butoxy-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid, 397.94 mg (1.05 mmol) of HATU and 416.68 l (309.18 mg, 2.39 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight. The solution is diluted with acetonitrile and water and purified by preparative HPLC. The product fractions are combined, and the solvent is removed. The residue is dried under high vacuum. This gives 363 mg (78% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): Rr= 4.97 min MS (ES+): m/z = 627 (M+H)+
' H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.08-9.76 (m, 1 H), 8.93-8.80 (m, I H), 7.93-6.61 (m, 13H), 4.63-3.42 (m, I OH), 2.92-2.64 (m, 1 H), 2.58-2.42 (m, 1 H), 1.44-0.55 (m, 15H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 32 3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-4-[{2-[(l,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}(isopropyl)-amino]-4-oxobutanoic acid H3c~0 H3C"0 ~
H
N~
~ N
0 H3C CH ~ N
OH
310 mg (0.50 mmol) of tert-butyl3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-[{2-[(l,4-diphenyl-IH-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}(isopropyl)amino]-4-oxobutanoate are dissolved in 20 ml of a 4N solution of hydrogen chloride in dioxane and stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure with gentle heating, and the residue is separated by preparative HPLC. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 128 mg (45% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.29 min MS (ES+): m/z = 571 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 12.09 (br s, I H), 10.04-9.80 (m, I H), 8.92-8.80 (m, I H), 7.93-6.65 (m, 13H), 4.65-3.40 (m, l OH), 3.01-2.76 (m, 1 H), 2.59-2.39 (m, 1 H
under the DMSO signal), 1.27-0.57 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 33 2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-N-{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl }-4-hydroxy-N-isopropylbutanamide H3C~o H3c /o o \ I N
N~
H CH O N--N
\
OH b 50 mg (0.15 mmol) of N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 2 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 58 mg (0.16 mmol) of 4-{[tert-butyl(dimethyl)silyl]oxy}-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)butanoic acid, 33 l (0.19 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine and 85 mg (0.16 mmol) of PyBOP are added. The reaction solution is stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then diluted with dichloromethane. The mixture is washed twice with 5%
strength potassium bisulfate solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, and the organic phase is dried and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. 0.3 ml of trifluoroacetic acid and a little dichloroinethane are added to the residue, after 5 min, the mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed once with IN aqueous sodium hydroxide solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution and the organic phase is dried and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure.
The residue is separated by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water, and the product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 51 mg (61 % of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.31 min MS (ES+): m/z = 557 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 9.9 (m, 1 H), 8.9 (m, 1 H9, 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.7 (d, 1 H), 7.6 (m, 2H),7.2-7.4(m3H),6.7-6.9(m,3H),3.5-4.5(m,7H),3.4(s,6H),3.2(m,lH),2.1(m,2H),1.7 (m, 1 H), 0.6-1.2 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 34 2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-N-{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}-3-hydroxy-N-isopropylpropanamide H3C~0 H3C~0 O
H
N/\/N
HO H C~CH IOI N~N
80 mg (0.26 mmol) of N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 2 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 59 mg (0.26 mmol) of 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-3-hydroxypropanoic acid, 52 l (0.29 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine and 137 mg (0.26 mmol) of PyBOP are added. The reaction solution is stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then diluted with acetonitrile. The mixture is separated by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water, and the product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 26 mg (20% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.29 min MS (ES+): m/z = 543 (M+H)+
I H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 10.0 (m, 1H), 8.9 (m, IH9, 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.7 (d, 1H), 7.6 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m 3H), 6.7-6.9 (m, 3H), 3.5-4.5 (m, 9H), 3.4 (s, 6H), 0.6-1.2 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 35 1-[2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)propanoyl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl )-D-prolinamide I \
/
O
CNN
~ N-N
H3c, o CH3 At 0 C, 1 ml of trifluoroacetic acid is added to a solution of 31 mg (0.07 mmol) of tert-butyl (2R)-2-[(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-l-carboxylate in I ml of dichloromethane. The mixture is stirred at RT for 18 h and evaporated to dryness. 2.5 ml of DMF
are then added, followed by 16 mg (0.077 mmol) of 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)propionic acid, 61 l of diisopropylethylamine and 29 mg (0.077 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 30 mg (82% of theory) of product.
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 525 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 3): R, = 2.51 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 10.0 (d, l H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (b, 2H), 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (rn, 4H), 6.7-6.9 (m, 3H), 4.4-4.6 (m, 1 H), 3.8 -3.9 (m, IH), 3.7 (b, 6H), 3.1-3.3 (m ,2H) 1.7-2.2 (m, 4H).
The examples of the table below are prepared analogously to example 1(examples 36 and 37) or example 35 (examples 38 to 44) using the appropriate amine and the appropriate carboxylic acid.
Suitable for use as coupling agents are also N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) or (1 H-benzotriazol-1-yloxy)(tripyrrolidin-l-yl)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP). In examples 41, 43 and 44, the TBDMS-protected alcohol is desilylated analogously to example 33.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 529 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 3): R, = 2.47 min.
36 ~H3 N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
/~\
N-N 10.1 (s, 1 H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (b, 2H), H3C\ ~ O
O O 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.7-- 6.9(m,3H),4.3-5.1(m,3H),3.6 -3.8 (m, 8H), 3.1-3.4 (m ,2H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 511 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 4): Rt = 3.38 min.
37 ~H3 N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S=
/
N-N 10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (b, 2H), H3C~0 \ I O O ~ 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.7-~
- 6.9 (m, 3H), 4.5-4.7 (m, IH), 3.5 -3.9 (m, 11 H), 1.7-2.2 (m, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 555 (M+H)+
H 3 C HPLC (method 4): Rt = 3.28 min.
38 /F N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S=
H3C~ O O N~ ~ 10.07-9.89 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.76 (s, 1 H), N 7.93-7.78 (m, 2H), 7.65-7.16 (m, H3C-O ~ l OH), 4.44-4.26 (m, 1 H), 4.05-3.83 ~ (m, 1 H), 2.4-2.18 (m, 2H), 2.07-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.45 (m, IH), 1.44-1.35 (m, 9H), 1.28-1.03 (m, 4H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization ~ MS (ESIpos): m/z = 573 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 4): Rt = 2.48 min.
39 H 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S =
H3C N 10.05-9.89 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.78 (s, 1 H), H C"O 0 0 N-N 7.93-7.78 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.18 (m, 3 9H), 4.42-4.24 (m, IH), 4.03-3.82 / \ (m, 1H), 2.39-2.18 (m, 2H), 2.09-HsC~O 1.83 (m, 2H), 1.55-1.44 (m, IH), F 1.43-1.35 (m, 9H), 1.29-1.05 (m, O
~CH3 4H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 493 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 4): Rt = 2.27 min.
40 H 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S=
H3C N ~ 10.06-9.89 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.77 (s, 1 H), 0 0 N-N 7.91-7.81 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.19 (m, IOH), 4.41-4.26 (m, IH), 4.00-3.86 (m, 1 H), 2.39-2.2 (m, 1 H), 2.11-1.81 CH (m, 2H), 1.57-1.43 (m, IH), 1.42-I .36 (m, 8H), 1.27-1.02 (m, 4H). F LC-MS (method 1): Rr = 2.41 min;
HO m/z = 555.4 (M+H)+
41 NO 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8 =
9.9-10.3 (m, IH), 8.8-8.9 (m, IH), H3C O H N \ \
~ N-N 7.8-7.9 (m, 2H), 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 6.9-H3C 7.4 (m, 6H), 3.9-4.6 (m, 3H), 3.0-3.3 2H), 1.4-2.4 (m, 12H), 0.9-1.3 (m, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 559 (M+H)+
H3C HPLC (method 4): R, = 3.57 min.
42 IF N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 0 10.05-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.88-8.81 (s, IH), N~
N 7.91-7.8 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.17 (m, 9H), 4.4-4.26 (m, IH), 4.04-3.85 (m, 1 H), 2.39-2.2 (m, IH), 2.08-1.8 (m, 2H), 1.56-1.43 (m, IH), 1.42-1.35 (m, 8H), 1.3-1.05 (m, 4H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 573 (M+H)+
HO H3C HPLC (method 4): Rt = 3.57 min.
N H
43 jTN 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 _ O O// 10.07-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.9-8.79 (s, IH), N~N 7.91-7.8 (m, 2H), 7.63-7.18 (m, 9H), 4.4-4.24 (m, IH), 4.04-3.85 (m, 1 H), HaC-O CI 2.38-2.18 (m, IH), 2.04-1.82 (m, 2H), 1.57-1.29 (m, 11 H), 1.27-1.05 (m, 4H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 569 (M+H)+
HO C-~~ HPLC (method 4): R, = 2.33 min.
44 N "f~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 0 O/ 10.04-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.92-8.8 (s, 1 H), N~N 7.9-7.78 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.18 (m, 9H), 4.4-4.26 (m, IH), 4.03-3.85 (m, 1 H), H3C-O 0 2.58-2.54 (m, 3H), 2.4-2.19 (m, 1 H), H3C 2.07-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.31 (m, I I H), 1.27-1.05 (m, 4H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries B) Evaluation of the physiological activity The suitability of the compounds according to the invention for treating thromboembolic disorders can be demonstrated using the following assay systems:
In vitro enzyme assay Measurement of the thrombin inhibition To determine the thrombin inhibition of the substances listed above, a biochemical test system is used in which the conversion of a thrombin substrate is used for determining the enzymatic activity of human thrombin. Here, thrombin cleaves aminomethylcoumarin, which is measured fluorescently, from the peptic substrate. The determination is carried out in microtiter plates.
Substances to be tested are dissolved in various concentrations in dimethyl sulfoxide and incubated for 15 min with human thrombin (0.06 nmol/1 dissolved in 50 mmol/1 of Tris buffer [C,C,C-tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane], 100 mmol/l of NaCI, 0.1 % BSA [bovine serum albumin], pH 7.4) at 22 C. The substrate (5 mol/1 Boc-Asp(OBzI)-Pro-Arg-AMC from Bachem) is then added. After 30 min of incubation, the sample is excited at a wavelength of 360 nm and the emission is measured at 460 nm. The ineasured emissions of the test batches with test substance are compared to the control batches without test substance (only dimethyl sulfoxide instead of test substance in dimethyl sulfoxide) and the IC50 values are calculated from the concentration/activity relationships. Representative activity data from this test are listed in table A below:
Table A
Example No. ICSO InMI
39 5.1 42 0.48 44 1.9 BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Determination of the selectivity To demonstrate the selectivity of the substances with respect to thrombin inhibition, the test substances are examined for their inhibition of other human serin proteases, such as factor Xa, factor Xla, trypsin and plasmin. To determine the enzymatic activity of factor Xa (1.3 nmol/1 from Kordia), factor XIa (0.4 nmol/I from Kordia), trypsin (83 mU/ml from Sigma) and plasmin (0.1 g/ml from Kordia), these enzymes are dissolved (50 mmol/I of Tris buffer [C,C,C-tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane], 100 mmol/1 of NaCI, 0.1 % BSA [bovine serum albumin], 5 mmol/I of calcium chloride, pH 7.4) and incubated for 15 min with test substance in various concentrations in dimethyl sulfoxide and also with dimethyl sulfoxide without test substance. The enzymatic reaction is then started by addition of the appropriate substrates (5 mol/1 of Boc-Ile-Glu-Gly-Arg-AMC from Bachem for factor Xa and trypsin, 5 mol/1 of Boc-Glu(OBzI)-Ala-Arg-AMC from Bachem for factor XIa, 50 mol/1 of MeOSuc-Ala-Phe-Lys-AMC from Bachem for plasmin). After an incubation time of 30 min at 22 C, fluorescence is measured (excitation:
360 nm, emission: 460 nm). The measured emissions of the test batches with test substance are compared to the control batches without test substance (only dimethyl sulfoxide instead of test substance in dimethyl sulfoxide), and the IC50 values are calculated from the concentration/activity relationships.
Thrombin plasma assay In a 96-well flat-bottom plate, 20 l of substance dilution (in water) are mixed with 20 l of ecarin (ecarin reagent, from Sigma E-0504, final concentration 20 mU/ml, final concentration in the well 20 mU) in Ca buffer (200 mM Hepes + 560 mM NaCl + 10 mM CaC12 + 0.4% PEG). To the first 3 upper wells A1-A3, only Ca buffer is added; these samples serve as non-stimulated controls.
Furthermore, 20 [t] of fluorogenic thrombin substrate (from Bachem 1-1120, final concentration in the well 50 pM) and 20 l of citrate plasma (from Octapharma) are added to each well, and the mixtures are homogenized well. The plate is read in a Spectra fluor plus reader having a 360 nm excitation filter and a 465 nm emission filter every minute over a period of 20 min. The IC50 value is determined after about 12 minutes when 70% of the maximum value is reached.
Thrombin generation assay (thrombo2ram) The effect of the test substances on the thrombogram (Thrombin Generation Assay according to Hemker) is determined in vitro in human plasma (Octaplas(W from Octapharma).
In the thrombin generation assay according to Hemker, the activity of thrombin in coagulating plasma is determined by measuring the fluorescent cleavage products of the substrate 1-1140 BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries (Z-Gly-Gly-Arg-AMC, Bachem). The reactions are carried out in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvents. To start the reaction, reagents from Thrombinoscope (PPP reagent: 30 pM recombinant tissue factor, 24 M
phospholipids in HEPES) are used. Moreover, a thrombin calibrator from Thrombinoscope is used whose amidolytic activity is required for calculating the thrombin activity in a sample containing an unknown amount of thrombin. The test is carried out according to the specifications of the manufacturer (Thrombionscope BV): 4 pl of test substance or of the solvent, 76 l of plasma and 20 1 of PPP
reagent or thrombin calibrator are incubated at 37 C for 5 min. After addition of 20 l of 2.5 mM
thrombin substrate in 20 mM hepes, 60 mg/ml of BSA, 102 mM of CaClz, the thrombin generation is measured every 20 s over a period of 120 min. Measurement is carried out using a fluorometer (fluoroskan Ascent) from Thermo Electron fitted with a 390/460 nm filter pair and a dispenser.
Using the Thrombinoscope software, the thrombogram is calculated and represented graphically.
What is calculated are the following parameters: lag time, time to peak, peak, ETP (endogenous thrombin potential) and start tail.
Determination of the anticoa2ulatory activity The anticoagulatory activity of the test substances is determined in vitro in human plasma, rabbit plasma and rat plasma. To this end, blood is drawn off in a mixing ratio of sodium citrate/blood of 1/9 using a 0.11 molar sodium citrate solution as receiver. Immediately after the blood has been drawn off, it is mixed thoroughly and centrifuged at about 4000 g for 15 minutes. The supernatant is pipetted off.
The prothrombin time (PT, synonyms: thromboplastin time, quick test) is determined in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvent using a commercial test kit (Neoplastin from Boehringer Mannheim or Hemoliance RecombiPlastin from Instrumentation Laboratory). The test compounds are incubated with the plasma at 37 C for 3 minutes. Coagulation is then started by addition of thromboplastin, and the time when coagulation occurs is determined. The concentration of test substance which effected a doubling of the prothrombin time is detetermined.
The thrombin time (TT) is determined in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvent using a commercial test kit (Thrombin Reagent from Roche). The test compounds are incubated with the plasma at 37 C for 3 minutes. Coagulation is then started by addition of the thrombin reagent, and the time when coagulation occurs is determined. The concentration of test substance which effects a doubling of the thrombin time is determined.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is determined in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvent using a commercial test kit (PTT
reagent from Roche). The test compounds are incubated with the plasma and the PTT reagent (Cephalin, Kaolin) at 37 C for 3 minutes. Coagulation is then started by addition of 25 mM CaClz, and the time when coagulation occurs is determined. The concentration of test substance which effects a doubling of the APTT is determined.
Thromboelastographv (thromboelastogram) The thromboelastography is carried out with the aid of the thromboelastograph ROTEM from Pentapharm and its accessories, cup and pin. The measurement is carried out in whole blood drawn off beforehand into sodium citrate monovettes from Sarstedt. The blood in the monovettes is kept in motion using a shaker and preincubated at 37 C for 30 min. For the measurement, 20 l of CaCIZ solution from a 200 mM stock solution (diluted with 0.9% NaCI) are initially charged into the cups (final concentration 12.5 mM). 3.2 l of substance or solvent are added. The measurement is started by addition of 300 l of whole blood. After the addition, using the tip of the pipette, the mixture is briefly drawn into the pipette and released again without generating air bubbles. The measurement is carried out over a period of 2.5 hours or stopped when fibrinolysis sets in. For evaluation, the following parameters are determined: CT(clotting time/[sec.]), CFT (clotting formation time/[sec.]), MCF (maximum clot firmness/[mm]) and the alpha angle [
]. The measurement points are determined every 3 seconds and represented graphically, with the y axis for MCF [mm] and the x axis for time [sec.].
Arteriovenous shunt and hemorrha2e model (combi-model rat) Fasting male rats (strain: HSD CPB:WU) having a weight of 300-350 g are anesthetized using lnactin (150-180 mg/kg). Thrombin formation is initiated in an arteriovenous shunt in accordance with the method described by Christopher N. Berry et al., Br. J. Pharmacol.
(1994), 11i, 1209-1214. To this end, the left jugular vein and the right carotid artery are exposed. The two vessels are connected by an extracorporeal shunt using a polyethylene tube (PE
60) of a length of 10 cm. In the middle, this polyethylene tube is attached to a further polyethylene tube (PE 160) of a length of 3 cm which contains a roughened nylon thread arranged in the form of a loop, to form a thrombogenic surface. The extracorporeal circulation is maintained for 15 minutes. The shunt is then removed and the nylon thread with the thrombus is weighed immediately.
The weight of the nylon thread on its own is determined before the experiment has started.
To determine the bleeding time, immediately after opening of the shunt circulation, the tip of the tail of the rats is docked by 3 mm using a razor blade. The tail is then placed into physiological BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries saline kept at a temperature of 37 C, and the bleeding from the cut is observed over a period of 15 minutes. What is determined are the time until bleeding ceases for at least 30 seconds (initial bleeding time), total bleeding time over a period of 15 minutes (cumulative bleeding time) and the quantitative blood loss via photometric determination of the collected hemoglobin.
Before the extracorporeal circulation is set up and the tip of the tail is docked, the test substances are administered to the animals while awake either intravenously via the contralateral jugular vein as a single bolus or as a bolus with subsequent continuous infusion or orally using a pharyngeal tube.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries C) Exemplary embodiments of pharmaceutical compositions The compounds according to the invention can be converted into pharmaceutical preparations in the following ways:
Tablet:
Composition:
100 mg of the compound of Example 1, 50 mg of lactose (monohydrate), 50 mg of corn starch, mg of polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP 25) (from BASF, Germany) and 2 mg of magnesium stearate.
Tablet weight 212 mg. Diameter 8 mm, radius of curvature 12 mm.
Preparation:
10 The mixture of the compound of Example 1, lactose and starch is granulated with a 5% strength solution (m/m) of PVP in water. The granules are dried and then mixed with the magnesium stearate for 5 minutes. This mixture is compressed using a conventional tablet press (see above for format of the tablet).
Oral suspension:
Composition:
1000 mg of the compound of Example 1, 1000 mg of ethanol (96%), 400 mg of Rhodigel (xanthan gum) (from FMC, USA) and 99 g of water 10 ml of oral suspension are equivalent to a single dose of 100 mg of the compound according to the invention.
Preparation:
The Rhodigel is suspended in ethanol, and the compound of Example I is added to the suspension.
The water is added while stirring. The mixture is stirred for about 6 h until the swelling of the Rhodigel is complete.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Solution for intravenous administration:
Composition:
I mg of the compound of Example 1, 15 g of polyethylene glycol 400 and 250 g of water for injection.
Preparation:
The compound of Example I is dissolved together with polyethylene glycol 400 in the water with stirring. The solution is sterilized by filtration (pore diameter 0.22 pm) and dispensed under aseptic conditions into heat-sterilized infusion bottles. The latter are closed with infusion stoppers and trimmed caps.
The invention provides compounds of the formula O R H R
R N
H R5 R4 O N-N (I)>
\ R Z
in which Ri represents phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C,-C4-alkyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, C,-Ca-alkylamino, C,-Cq-alkylthio and C,-C4-alkylcarbonyl, R2 represents phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C,-C4-alkyl, C,-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylamino, Ci-C4-alkylthio and Ci-C4-alkylcarbonyl, BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries R' represents hydrogen, R4 represents C,-C6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl or C;-C6-cycloallcyl, where alkyl and alkenyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, Cl-C4-alkylamino and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring or a 1,3-thiazolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring and the 1,3-thiazolidine ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, CI-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, CI-C4-alkoxy and CI-C4-alkylamino, R5 represents hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, amino, CI-C6-alkyl, Ci-C6-alkoxy, Ci-C6-alkylamino, Ci-C6-alkylcarbonyloxy, Ci-C6-alkylcarbonylamino or 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where alkyl and alkylamino may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, hydroxycarbonyl, Cj-C6-alkylamino, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl and 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where heterocyclyl for its part may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, CI-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylamino, Ci-Ca-alkylthio, C,-C4-alkylcarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkylcarbonyl-amino, Cl-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and CI-C4-alkyl-carbonyloxy, and where heterocyclyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries aminocarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy, Ci-C4-alkylamino, Cl-C4-alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, CI -C4-alkylcarbonylamino, CI-C4-alkylamino-carbonyl, CI -C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and C,-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, CX4-alkyl, C,-C4-alkoxy and Ci-C4-alkylamino, R6 represents phenyl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, C3-C6-cycloalkyl or 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, Cl-C4-alkylamino, alkylthio, Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyl, C,-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, C,-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, C,-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, C,-C4-alkylsulfonyl and Cl-C4-alkylsulfinyl, and where cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, ainino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylamino, alkylthio, Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, C,-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and Cl-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries R ' R O *
O
where * indicates the carbon atom to which R5 and R6 are attached, and R7 and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclopentane ring or cyclohexane ring, where the cyclopentane ring and the cyclohexane ring may be substituted by I
to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, Ci-C4-alkyl, Cl-C4-alkoxy ar-d CI-C4-alkylamino, and where R3 and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, and their salts, their solvates and the solvates of their salts.
Compounds according to the invention are the compounds of the formula (1) and their salts, solvates and solvates of the salts, and the compounds, comprised by formula (I), mentioned below as embodiments and their salts, solvates and solvates of the salts if the compounds, comprised by formula (I), mentioned below are not already salts, solvates and solvates of the salts.
Depending on their structure, the compounds according to the invention can exist in stereoisomeric forms (enantiomers, diastereomers). Accordingly, the invention comprises the enantiomers or diastereomers and their respective mixtures. From such mixtures of enantiomers and/or diastereomers, it is possible to isolate the stereoisomerically uniform components in a known manner.
If the compounds according to the invention can be present in tautomeric forms, the present invention comprises all tautomeric forms.
In the context of the present invention, preferred salts are physiologically acceptable salts of the BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries compounds according to the invention. The invention also comprises salts which for their part are not suitable for pharmaceutical applications, but which can be used, for example, for isolating or purifying the compounds according to the invention.
Physiologically acceptable salts of the compounds according to the invention include acid addition salts of mineral acids, carboxylic acids and sulfonic acids, for example salts of hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, naphthalene disulfonic acid, acetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, propionic acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, citric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid and benzoic acid.
Physiologically acceptable salts of the compounds according to the invention also include salts of customary bases, such as, by way of example and by way of preference, alkali metal salts (for example sodium salts and potassium salts), alkaline earth metal salts (for example calcium salts and magnesium salts) and ammonium salts, derived from ammonia or organic amines having I to 16 carbon atoms, such as, by way of example and by way of preference, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, ethyldiisopropylamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, dicyclohexylamine, dimethylaminoethanol, procaine, dibenzylamine, N-methylmorpholine, arginine, lysine, ethylenediamine, N-methylpiperidine and choline.
In the context of the invention, solvates are those forms of the compounds according to the invention which, in solid or liquid state, form a complex by coordination with solvent molecules.
Hydrates are a specific form of the solvates where the coordination is with water.
Moreover, the present invention also comprises prodrugs of the compounds according to the invention. The term "prodrugs" includes compounds which for their part may be biologically active or inactive but which, during the time they spend in the body, are converted into compounds according to the invention (for example metabolically or hydrolytically).
In the context of the present invention, unless specified differently, the substituents have the following meanings:
Alkyl per se and "alk" and "alkyl" in alkoxy, alkylamino, alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl alkylcarbonylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkylaminocarbonyl, alk lsulfonyl alkylsulfinyl, alkoxycarbonyl and alkoxycarbon lay mino represents a straight-chain or branched alkyl radical having I to 6, preferably I to 4, carbon atoms, by way of example and by way of preference methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl and n-hexyl.
Alkenyl represents a straight-chain or branched alkenyl radical having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Preference is given to a straight-chain or branched alkenyl radical having 2 to 4, particularly preferably 2 or 3, carbon atoms. The following radicals may be mentioned by way of example and by way of preference: vinyl, allyl, n-prop-l-en-1-y) and n-but-2-en-1-yl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkoxy represents methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy and tert-butoxy.
Alkylamino represents an alkylamino radical having one or two alkyl substituents (selected independently of one another), by way of example and by way of preference methylamino, ethylamino, n-propylamino, isopropylamino, tert-butylamino, n-pentylamino, n-hexylamino, N,N-dimethylamino, N,N-diethylamino, N-ethyl-N-methylamino, N-methyl-N-n-propylamino, N-isopropyl-N-n-propylamino, N-tert-butyl-N-methylamino, N-ethyl-N-n-pentylamino and N-n-hexyl-N-methylamino. C,-C3-Alkylamino represents, for example, a monoalkylamino radical having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or represents a dialkylamino radical having in each case I to 3 carbon atoms per alkyl substituent.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylthio represents methylthio, ethylthio, n-propylthio, isopropylthio, tert-butylthio, n-pentylthio and n-hexylthio.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylcarbonyl represents methylcarbonyl, ethylcarbonyl, n-propylcarbonyl, isopropylcarbonyl, n-butylcarbonyl and tert-butylcarbonyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylcarbonylamino represents methylcarbonylamino, ethylcarbonylamino, n-propylcarbonylamino, isopropylcarbonylamino, n-butylcarbonylamino and tert-butylcarbonylamino.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylcarbonyloxy represents methylcarbonyloxy, ethylcarbonyloxy, n-propylcarbonyloxy, isopropylcarbonyloxy, n-butylcarbonyloxy and tert-butylcarbonyloxy.
Alkylaminocarbonyl represents an alkylaminocarbonyl radical having one or two alkyl substituents (selected independently of one another), by way of example and by way of preference methylaminocarbonyl, ethylaminocarbonyl, n-propylaminocarbonyl, isopropylaminocarbonyl, tert-butylaminocarbonyl, n-pentylaminocarbonyl, n-hexylaminocarbonyl, N,N-dimethylaminocarbonyl, N,N-diethylaminocarbonyl, N-ethyl-N-methylaminocarbonyl, N-methyl-N-n-propylaminocarbonyl, N-isopropyl-N-n-propylaminocarbonyl, N-tert-butyl-N-methylaminocarbonyl, N-ethyl-N-n-pentylaminocarbonyl and N-n-hexyl-N-methylaminocarbonyl. C,-C3-Alkylaminocarbonyl represents, for example, a monoalkylaminocarbonyl radical having I to 3 carbon atoms or represents a dialkylaminocarbonyl radical having in each case I to 3 carbon atoms per alkyl substituent.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries By way of example and by way of preference, alkylsulfonyl represents methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, n-propylsulfonyl, isopropylsulfonyl, n-butylsulfonyl and tert-butylsulfonyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkylsulfinyl represents methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, n-propylsulfinyl, isopropylsulfinyl, n-butylsulfinyl and tert-butylsulfinyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkoxycarbonyl represents methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, n-propoxycarbonyl, isopropoxycarbonyl, n-butoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, n-pentoxycarbonyl and n-hexoxycarbonyl.
By way of example and by way of preference, alkoxycarbonylamino represents methoxycarbonyl amino, ethoxycarbonylamino, n-propoxycarbonylamino, isopropoxycarbonylamino, n-butoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, n-pentoxycarbonylamino and n-hexoxycarbonyl-amino.
Cycloalkyl represents a monocyclic cycloalkyl group having generally 3 to 6, preferably 3, 5 or 6, carbon atoms, by way of example and by way of preference, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl may be mentioned for cycloalkyl.
Heterocyclyl represents a monocyclic heterocyclic radical having generally 5 to 7, preferably 5 or 6, ring atoms and up to 3, preferably up to 2, heteroatoms and/or hetero groups from the group consisting of N, 0, S, SO, SOz, where a nitrogen atom may also form an N-oxide. The heterocyclyl radicals can be saturated or partially unsaturated. Preference is given to 5-or 6- membered monocyclic saturated heterocyclyl radicals having up to 2 heteroatoms from the group consisting of 0, N and S, by way of example and by way of preference pyrrolidin-2-yl, pyrrolidin-3-yl, pyrrolinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, pyranyl, piperidin-1-yl, piperidin-2-yl, piperidin-3-yl, piperidin-4-yl, thiopyranyl, morpholin-1-yl, morpholin-2-yl, morpholin-3-yl, perhydroazepinyl, piperazin-l-yl and piperazin-2-yl.
Heteroaryl represents an aromatic monocyclic radical having 5 or 6 ring atoms and up to 4, preferably up to 2, heteroatoms from the group consisting of S, 0 and N, where a nitrogen atom may also form an N-oxide, by way of example and by way of preference thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl and pyrazinyl.
Halogen represents fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine, preferably fluorine and chlorine.
If radicals in the compounds of the formula (1), their salts, their solvates or the solvates of their salts are substituted, the radicals can, unless specified otherwise, be mono-or polysubstituted by identical or different substituents. Substitution with up to three identical or different substituents is BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries preferred. Very particular preference is given to substitution with one substituent.
Preference is given to the compounds of the formula (I) in which R' represents phenyl, pyridyl or pyrimidyl, where phenyl, pyridyl and pyrimidyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, CI-C4-alkyl, CI-C4-alkoxy, C,-C4-alkylamino, C,-C4-alkylthio and Ci-C4-alkylcarbonyl, R2 represents phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl or imidazolyl, where phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and imidazolyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethyl, CI-C4-alkyl and CI-Ca-alkoxy, R' represents hydrogen, R4 represents CI-C6-alkyl or C3-C6-cycloalkyl, where alkyl may be substituted with I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, CI-C4-alkoxy, Ci-C4-alkylamino and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of CI-C4-alkyl and CI-C4-alkoxy, R5 represents hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, amino, Ci-C6-alkyl, C,-C6-alkoxy, alkylamino, CI-C6-alkylcarbonyloxy, Ci-C6-alkylcarbonylamino, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl or 4-(CI-C4-alkyl)piperazinyl, where alkyl and alkylamino may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, hydroxycarbonyl, C1-C6-BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries alkylamino, Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl, where pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl for their part may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C]-C4-alkyl and CX4-alkoxy, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of CI-C4-alkyl, R6 represents phenyl, cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl or thiopyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, CI-C4-alkyl, Cl-C4-alkoxy, CI-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, CI-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and Cl-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, and where cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl and thiopyranyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, oxo, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C,-C4-alkyl, C,-C4-alkoxy, C,-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, C I-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and C i-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, or RS and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula R' R8 O
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries where * indicates the carbon atom to which Rs and R6 are attached, and R' and R 8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R' and RS are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, and their salts, their solvates and the solvates of their salts.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I) in which R' represents phenyl or pyridyl, where phenyl and pyridyl may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen and methoxy, R 2 represents phenyl, pyridyl or thienyl, where phenyl and thienyl may be substituted by I or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of fluorine, chlorine and bromine, R3 represents hydrogen, R4 represents isopropyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by I or 2 methyl substituents, R5 represents hydrogen, Ci-C4-alkyl or Ci-C4-alkoxy, where alkyl may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries group consisting of hydroxyl, hydroxycarbonyl and C,-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 methyl substituents, R' represents phenyl or 4-pyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl and C,-C4-alkoxy, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula :08*
where * indicates the carbon atom to which R 5 and R6 are attached, and R' and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R' and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, and their salts, their solvates and the solvates of their salts.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (1), in which R' represents phenyl, where phenyl may be substituted by a fluorine substituent.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R 2 represents phenyl or thienyl, where phenyl and thienyl may be substituted by a fluorine or chlorine substituent.
Particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (1), in which R2 represents thienyl, where thienyl may be substituted by a fluorine substituent.
Very particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R 2 represents 5-fluoro-2-thienyl or 5-chloro-2-thienyl.
Very particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R 2 represents 5-fluoro-2-thienyl.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R3 represents hydrogen.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R4 represents isopropyl.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R5 represents hydrogen or C,-C4-alkyl, where alkyl may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl and hydroxycarbonyl.
Preference is also given to compounds of the formula (1), in which R6 represents phenyl, where phenyl may be substituted by I to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl and C,-C4-alkoxy.
Particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R6 represents phenyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 2 methoxy substituents or one methoxy substituent and one chlorine substituent.
Very particular preference is also given to compounds of the formula (I), in which R6 represents 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl or 3-chloro-4-methoxyphenyl.
The invention furthermore provides a process for preparing the compounds of the formula (I), where according to process [A] a compound of the formula H R~
N
HN
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries in which R', RZ, R' and R4 have the meaning given above, is reacted with a compound of the formula O
AHY' Rs (III), in which R5 and R6 have the meaning given above and YI represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine or iodine, or hydroxyl, or [B] a compound of the formula R' H2N ~ ~ (IV), N-N
R
in which R' and R2 have the meaning given above, is reacted with a compound of the formula N /
H R5 R4 O lV), in which R3, R4, R5 and R6 have the meaning given above and Y2 represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine oder iodine, or hydroxyl.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The reaction according to process [A] and process [B] is, if Y' or YZ is halogen, generally carried out in inert solvents, in the presence of a base, preferably in a temperature range of from 0 C to 40 C at atmospheric pressure.
Inert solvents are, for example, halogenated hydrocarbons, such as methylene chloride, trichloromethane or 1,2-dichloroethane, ethers, such as dioxane, tetrahydrofuran or 1,2-dimethoxyethane, or other solvents, such as acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, 2-butanone or acetonitrile; preference is given to tetrahydrofuran or methylene chloride.
Bases are, for example, alkali metal carbonates, such as cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate or potassium carbonate, or sodium methoxide or potassium methoxide, or sodium ethoxide or potassium ethoxide or potassium tert-butoxide, or amides, such as sodium amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide or lithium diisopropylamide, or other bases, such as sodium hydride, DBU, triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine; preference is given to diisopropylethylamine.
The reaction according to the process [A] and process [B] is, if Y' or Yz is hydroxyl, generally carried out in inert solvents, in the presence of dehydrating agents, if appropriate in the presence of a base, preferably in a temperature range of from 0 C to room temperature at atmospheric pressure.
Suitable dehydrating agents are here, for example, carbodiimides, such as, for example, N,N'-diethyl-, N,N'-dipropyl-, N,N'-diisopropyl-, N,N'-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide, N-(3-dimethylamino-isopropyl)-N'-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC) (if appropriate in the presence of pentafluorophenol (PFP)), N-cyclohexylcarbodiimide-N'-propyloxymethyl-polystyrene (PS-carbodiimide), or carbonyl compounds, such as carbonyldiimidazole, or 1,2-oxazolium compounds, such as 2-ethyl-5-phenyl-l,2-oxazolium 3-sulfate or 2-tert-butyl-5-methylisoxazolium perchlorate, or acylamino compounds, such as 2-ethoxy-l-ethoxycarbonyl-l,2-dihydroquinoline, or propanephosphonic anhydride, or isobutyl chloroformate, or bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphoryl chloride or benzotriazolyloxytri(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate, or O-(benzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HBTU), 2-(2-oxo-1-(2H)-pyridyl)-1,1,3,3-tetramethyluronium tetrafluoroborate (TPTU) or O-(7-azabenzotriazol-1-yl)-N,N,N',N'-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate (HATU), or 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (HOBt), or benzotriazol- l -yloxytris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (BOP), or mixtures of these, with bases. The condensation is preferably carried out using HOBt and EDC.
Bases are, for example, alkali metal carbonates, such as, for example, sodium carbonate or potassium carbonate or sodium bicarbonate or potassium bicarbonate, or organic bases, such as trialkylamines, for example triethylamine, N-methylmorpholine, N-methylpiperidine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine or diisopropylethylamine. The condensation is preferably carried out BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries using diisopropylethylamine.
Inert solvents are, for example, halogenated hydrocarbons, such as dichloromethane or trichloromethane, hydrocarbons, such as benzene, nitromethane, dioxane, dimethylformamide, acetonitrile or hexamethylphosphoric triamide. It is also possible to use mixtures of the solvents.
Particular preference is given to dichloromethane or dimethylformamide.
The compounds of the formula (111) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials.
The compounds of the formula (IV) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials. The preparation of the aminoimidazoles is as described, for example, by Cook, et al. J. Chem. Soc., 1949, 1074-1076 and Bador, et al. J.
Chem. Soc., 1950, 2775-2780.
The compounds of the formula (V) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials. Use is made, inter alia, of peptide couplings and alkylations.
The compounds of the formula (II) are known or can be prepared by reacting compounds of the formula H Ri s N
Y
(VI), O N_N
in which R', R 2 and R3 have the meaning given above, and Y3 represents halogen, preferably iodine, bromine or chlorine, with compounds of the formula H2N-R4 (VIl), in which R4 has the meaning given above.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The reaction is generally carried out in inert solvents, in the presence of a base, preferably in a temperature range of from 0 C to 40 C at atmospheric pressure.
Inert solvents are, for example, halogenated hydrocarbons, such as methylene chloride, trichloromethane or 1,2-dichloroethane, ethers, such as dioxane, tetrahydrofuran or 1,2-dimethoxyethane, or other solvents, such as acetone, dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide, 2-butanone or acetonitrile; preference is given to tetrahydrofuran or methylene chloride.
Bases are, for example, alkali metal carbonates, such as cesium carbonate, sodium carbonate, or potassium carbonate, or sodium methoxide or potassium methoxide, sodium ethoxide or potassium ethoxide or potassium tert-butoxide, or amides, such as sodium amide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide or lithium diisopropylamide, or other bases, such as sodium hydride, DBU, triethylamine or diisopropylethylamine; preference is given to diisopropylethylamine.
The compounds of the formula (VII) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials.
The compounds of the formula (VI) are known or can be prepared by reacting compounds of the formula (IV) with compounds of the formula (VI11), in which R3 has the meaning given above, Y3 represents halogen, preferably iodine, bromine or chlorine, and Y4 represents halogen, preferably iodine or bromine, or hydroxyl.
The reaction is carried out according to process [A].
The compounds of the formula (Vlll) are known or can be synthesized by known processes from the appropriate starting materials.
Alternatively to the process described above, the amines (II) can also be prepared by reductive amination of the primary amines using a suitable ketone or aldehyde. Here, the primary amines are obtained by acylation of the aminoimidazoles (IV), where the primary amine function is protected BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries during the acylation with a suitable protective group, such as, for example, a Boc group, which is removed after the reaction under reaction conditions known to the person skilled in the art. Here, preferred acylating agents are the N-protected amino acids, which are activated using a coupling agent.
The preparation of the starting materials and the compounds of the formula (I) can be illustrated by the synthesis scheme below.
Scheme:
N N
R' R~ YN
H N~0 H NO
R NHQ R NHz H3C Rz R 2 R2 \% S O Rz/N\NHz N N / \
0/ 0 RN Ri N Ri N
CN
\I%
NHz HN O HN~O
R Y
1, R
N
Ri H N~O
RS
R' N
The compounds according to the invention have an unforeseeable useful pharmacological and pharmacokinetic activity spectrum. They are compounds which have an effect on the proteolytic activity of the serin protease thrombin. The compounds according to the invention inhibit the enzymatic cleavage of substrates which play an important role in the activation of coagulation and the aggregation of platelets.
Accordingly, they are suitable for use as medicaments for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases in humans and animals.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The present invention furthermore provides the use of the compounds according to the invention for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of disorders, preferably thromboembolic disorders and/or thromboembolic complications.
The "thromboembolic diseases" within the meaning of the present invention in particular include diseases such as acute coronary syndrome (ACS), myocardial infarct with ST
segment elevation (STEMI) and without ST segment elevation (non-STEMI), stable angina pectoris, unstable angina pectoris, reocclusions and restenoses after coronary interventions such as angioplasty, stent implantation or aortocoronary bypass, peripheral arterial occlusive diseases, pulmonary embolisms, venous thromboses, in particular deep vein thromboses and renal vein thromboses, transitory ischemic attacks, and thrombotic and thromboembolic cerebral stroke.
The compounds according to the invention are therefore also suitable for the prevention and treatment of cardiogenic thromboembolisms, such as, for example, cerebral ischemias, stroke and systemic thromboembolisms and ischemias in patients with acute, intermittent or persistent cardiac arrhythmias, such as, for example, atrial fibrillation, and those who are subject to cardioversion, furthermore in the case of patients with heart valve diseases or with artificial heart valves.
Moreover, the compounds according to the invention are suitable for the treatment of disseminated intravasal clotting (DIC).
Thromboembolic complications furthermore occur in microangiopathic hemolytic anemias, extracorporeal blood circulations, such as hemodialysis, and heart valve prostheses.
Moreover, the compounds according to the invention are also suitable for influencing wound healing, for the prophylaxis and/or treatment of atherosclerotic vascular diseases and inflammatory diseases such as rheumatic diseases of the locomotor system, coronary heart diseases, heart failure, hypertension, inflammatory disorders, such as, for example, asthma, inflammatory pulmonary disorders, glomerular nephritis and inflammatory disorders of the intestine, moreover also for the prophylaxis and/or treatment of Alzheimer's disease. Moreover, the compounds according to the invention can be employed for the inhibition of tumor growth and of metastasis formation, in microangiopathies, age-related macular degeneration, diabetic retinopathy, diabetic nephropathy and other microvascular diseases, and for the prevention and treatment of thromboembolic complications, such as, for example, venous thromboembolisms, in tumor patients, in particular those who are subjected to relatively large surgical interventions or chemo-or radiotherapy.
The compounds according to the invention can moreover be employed for the prevention of coagulation ex vivo, e.g. for the preservation of blood and plasma products, for the cleaning/pretreatment of catheters and other medical aids and equipment, for the coating of BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries artificial surfaces of medical aids and equipment employed in vivo or ex vivo or in biological samples which contain blood platelets.
The present invention further relates to the use of the compounds according to the invention for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular of the aforementioned diseases.
The present invention furthermore relates to the use of the compounds according to the invention for the production of a medicament for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular of the aforementioned diseases.
The present invention furthermore relates to a process for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases, in particular of the aforementioned diseases, using a therapeutically effective amount of compound according to the invention.
The present invention furthermore relates to medicaments comprising a compound according to the invention and one or more other active substances, in particular for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of the aforementioned diseases. Suitable combination active substances which may be mentioned by way of example and preferably are:
= lipid-lowering agents, in particular HMG-CoA-(3-hydroxy-3-methylglutaryl-coenzyme A)-reductase inhibitors;
= coronary therapeutics/vasodilators, in particular ACE (angiotensin converting enzyme) inhibitors; All (angiotensin 11) receptor antagonists; beta-adrenoceptor antagonists; alpha-l-adrenoceptor antagonists; diuretics; calcium channel blockers; substances which bring about an increase in cyclic guanosine monophosphate (cGMP), such as, for example, stimulators of soluble guanylate cyclase;
= plasminogen activators (thrombolytics/fibrinolytics) and thrombolysis/fibrinolysis-increasing compounds such as inhibitors of the plasminogen activator inhibitor (PAI inhibitors) or inhibitors of the thrombin-activated fibrinolysis inhibitor (TAFI inhibitors);
= substances having anticoagulatory activity (anticoagulants);
= substances inhibiting platelet aggregation (platelet aggregation inhibitors, thrombocyte aggregation inhibitors);
= fibrinogen receptor antagonists (glycoprotein Ilb/IIIa antagonists);
= antiarrhythmics;
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries chemotherapeutics for malignant tumors, such as antimetabolites, alkylating zytostatics, topoisomerase inhibitors, mitose inhibitors and zytostatically active antibiotics, hormones, hormone antagonists, other zytostatics (antibodies, kinase inhibitors, zytokine).
The invention furthermore relates to a method for the prevention of blood coagulation in vitro, in particular in blood preserves or biological samples containing blood platelets, which method is characterized in that an anticoagulatory effective amount of the compound according to the invention is added.
The compounds according to the invention can act systemically and/or locally.
For this purpose, they can be administered in a suitable manner, such as, for example, orally, parenterally, pulmonarily, nasally, sublingually, lingually, buccally, rectally, dermally, transdermally, conjunctivally, otically or as an implant or stent.
For these administration routes, the compounds according to the invention can be administered in suitable administration forms.
For oral administration, administration forms functioning according to the prior art, releasing the compounds according to the invention rapidly and/or in modified form, which contain the compounds according to the invention in crystalline and/or amorphized and/or dissolved form, such as, for example, tablets (noncoated or coated tablets, for example with enteric coatings or coatings which dissolve with a delay or are insoluble, which control the release of the compound according to the invention), tablets disintegrating rapidly in the oral cavity or films/wafers, films/lyophilizates, capsules (for example hard or soft gelatin capsules), coated tablets, granules, pellets, powders, emulsions, suspensions, aerosols or solutions are suitable.
Parenteral administration can take place with circumvention of an absorption step (e.g.
intravenously, intraarterially, intracardially, intraspinally or intralumbarly) or with intervention of an absorption (e.g. intramuscularly, subcutaneously, intracutaneously, percutaneously or intraperitoneally). For parenteral administration, suitable administration forms are, inter alia, injection and infusion preparations in the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsions, lyophilizates or sterile powders.
Preference is given to oral administration.
For the other administration routes, for example, inhalation pharmaceutical forms (inter alia powder inhalers, nebulizers), nose drops, solutions or sprays; tablets to be administered lingually, sublingually or buccally, films/wafers or capsules, suppositories, ear or eye preparations, vaginal capsules, aqueous suspensions (lotions, shake mixtures), lipophilic suspensions, ointments, BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries creams, transdermal therapeutic systems (e.g. patches), milk, pastes, foams, dusting powders, implants or stents are suitable.
The compounds according to the invention can be converted to the administration forms mentioned. This can take place in a manner known per se by mixing with inert, nontoxic, pharmaceutically suitable excipients. These excipients include, inter alia, vehicles (for example microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, mannitol), solvents (e.g. liquid polyethylene glycols), emulsifiers and dispersants or wetting agents (for example sodium dodecylsulfate, polyoxysorbitan oleate), binders (for example polyvinylpyrrolidone), synthetic and natural polymers (for example albumin), stabilizers (e.g. antioxidants such as, for example, ascorbic acid), colorants (e.g.
inorganic pigments such as, for example, iron oxides) and taste and/or odor corrigents.
The present invention furthermore relates to medicaments comprising at least one compound according to the invention, preferably together with one or more inert non-toxic pharmaceutically suitable auxiliaries, and to their use for the purposes mentioned above.
In general, it has proven advantageous in the case of parenteral administration to administer amounts of approximately 5 to 250 mg every 24 hours to achieve effective results. In the case of oral administration, the dose is approximately 5 to 100 mg every 24 hours.
In spite of this, it may optionally be necessary to depart from the amounts mentioned, namely depending on body weight, route of administration, individual behavior toward the medicament, type of preparation and time or interval at which administration takes place.
The percentages in the tests and examples below are, unless indicated otherwise, percentages by weight; parts are parts by weight, solvent ratios, dilution ratios and concentrations of liquid/liquid solutions are in each case based on volume. The term "w/v" means "weight/volume". Thus, for example, "10% w/v" means: 100 ml of solution or suspension comprise 10 g of substance.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries A) Examples Abbreviations:
abs. absolute Boc tert-butoxycarbonyl CDC13 deuterochloroform CO2 carbon dioxide d day DIEA N,N-diisopropylethylamine DMAP 4-N,N-dimethylaminopyridine DMF dimethylformamide DMSO dimethyl sulfoxide oftheory oftheory EDC N'-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-N-ethylcarbodiimide x HCI
eq. equivalent ESI electrospray ionization (in MS) sat. saturated H hour HOBt 1-hydroxy-1 H-benzotriazole x H20 HPLC high-pressure, high-performance liquid chromatography conc. concentrated LC-MS liquid chromatography-coupled mass spectrometry min. minutes MS mass spectrometry M W molecular weight [g/mol]
NMR nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy PyBOP 1-benzotriazolyloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate Rf retention index (in TLC) RP-HPLC reversed-phase HPLC
RT room temperature R, retention time (in HPLC) TFA trifluoroacetic acid THF tetrahydrofuran BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries HPLC methods:
Method 1: Instrument: HP 1100 with DAD detection; column: Kromasil RP-18, 60 mm x 2 mm, 3.5 m; mobile phase A: 5 ml of perchloric acid/1 of water, mobile phase B:
acetonitrile; gradient:
0 min 2%B, 0.5 min 2%B, 4.5 min 90%B, 6.5 min 90%B, 6.7 min 2%B, 7.5 min 2%B;
flow rate:
0.75 ml/min; oven: 30 C; UV detection: 210 nm.
Method 2: Instrument: HP 1100 with DAD detection; column: Kromasil RP-18, 60 mm x 2 mm, 3.5 pm; mobile phase A: 5 ml of perchloric acid/1 of water, mobile phase B:
acetonitrile; gradient:
0 min 2%B, 0.5 min 2%B, 4.5 min 90%B, 9 min 90%B, 9.2 min 2%B, 10 min 2%B;
flow rate:
0.75 ml/min; oven: 30 C; UV detection: 210 nm.
LC-MS methods:
Method 1: MS instrument type: Micromass ZQ; HPLC instrument type: Waters Alliance 2795;
column: Phenomenex Synergi 2p hydro-RP Mercury 20 mm x 4 mm; mobile phase A: 1 l of water + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid, mobile phase B: 1 1 of acetonitrile +
0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid; gradient: 0.0 min 90%A 4 2.5 min 30%A 4 3.0 min 5%A 4 4.5 min 5%A; flow rate: 0.0 min I mI/min, 2.5 min/3.0 min/4.5 min 2 ml/min; oven: 50 C; UV
detection: 210 nm.
Method 2: Instrument: Micromass Platform LCZ with HPLC Agilent series 1100;
column:
Thermo Hypersil GOLD 3p 20 imn x 4 mm; mobile phase A: I I of water + 0.5 ml of 50% formic acid, mobile phase B: 1 1 of acetonitrile + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid; gradient: 0.0 min ] 00%A -> 0.2 min 100%A -> 2.9 min 30%A -> 3.1 min 10%A 4 5.5 min 10%A; flow rate:
0.0 min I ml/min, 2.5 min/3.0 min/4.5 min 2 ml/min; oven: 50 C; UV detection:
208-400 nm.
Method 3: Instrument: Micromass Quattro LCZ with HPLC Agilent series 1100;
column:
Phenomenex Gemini 3 30 mm x 3.00 mm; mobile phase A: I I of water + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid, mobile phase B: I I of acetonitrile + 0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid; gradient:
0.0 min 90%A 4 2.5 min 30%A 4 3.0 min 5%A -> 4.5 min 5%A; flow rate: 0.0 min I
ml/min, 2.5 min/3.0 min/4.5 min 2 ml/min; oven: 50 C; UV detection: 208-400 nm.
Method 4: Instrument: Micromass Quattro LCZ with HPLC Agilent Series 1100;
column:
Phenomenex Onyx Monolithic C18, 100 mm x 3 mm; mobile phase A: 1 I of water +
0.5 ml of 50% strength formic acid, mobile phase B: 1 1 of acetonitrile + 0.5 ml of 50%
strength formic acid;
gradient: 0.0 min 90%A 4 2 min 65%A 4 4.5 min 5%A 4 6 min 5%A; flow rate: 2 ml/min;
oven: 40 C; UV detection: 208- 400 nm.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries GC-MS methods:
Method 1: Instrument: Micromass GCT, GC6890; column: Restek RTX-35, 15 m x 200 m x 0.33 m; constant flow of helium: 0.88 ml/min; oven: 70 C; inlet: 250 C;
gradient: 70 C, 30 C/min -> 3 10 C (maintained for 3 min).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Starting materials Example lA
Sodium 2-cyano-2-phenylethenolate +
Na O
N
21.5 g(l84 mmol) of benzyl cyanide are introduced slowly into 135 ml (202 mmol) of a 1.5M
solution of sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide. The mixture is stirred at 10 C
for 30 min, and 14.2 g (193 mmol) of ethyl formate are then added dropwise. A precipitate forms, and after a further 16 h of stirring the precipitate is filtered off, washed with a little tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether and dried under reduced pressure. This gives 28.6 g (93% of theory) of crystals.
LC-MS (method 2): Rt = 2.99 min 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.0 (s, I H), 7.05 (m, 4H), 6.7 (t, I H).
Example 2A
2-Cyano-2-phenylvinyl 4-methyl benzenesulfonate Fi3C
\ ( ~O
/S'~' Q
O
3 5.3 g (185 mmol) of p-toluenesulfonyl chloride are dissolved in 50 ml of toluene, and 29.5 g BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries (176 mmol) of sodium 2-cyano-2-phenylethenolate, dissolved in 200 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, are added dropwise at 20 C. The mixture is stirred at room temperature for a further 2 h and then diluted with 1 1 of water. The mixture is adjusted to an alkaline pH using IN sodium hydroxide solution and extracted three times with in each case 300 ml of dichloromethane. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The oily residue is used without further purification for the subsequent reactions. 9.6 g (18% of theory) of product are obtained.
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 2.81 min Example 3A
1,4-Diphenyl-1 H-pyrazole-3-amine N-N
4.8 g (43.4 mmol) of potassium tert-butoxide are dissolved in 300 ml of anhydrous tetrahydrofuran, and 3.6 g (33.4 mmol) of phenylhydrazine are added at 0 C.
The mixture is stirred at this temperature for a further 10 min, and 10 g (33.4 mmol) of 2-cyano-2-phenylvinyl 4-methylbenzenesulfonate are then added a little at a time. Cooling is removed, and the reaction solution is heated gradually to 75 C. At this temperature, it is stirred for a further 5 h. The mixture is allowed to cool, and three quarters of the solvent are distilled off under reduced pressure. The mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed repeatedly with water. The organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by column chromatography on silica gel using a gradient of dichloromethane and methanol. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure.
This gives 3.7 g(41 % of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.15 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 236 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 8.6 (s, 1H), 7.75 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.2 (m, 2H), 5.2 (b, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 4A
2-Chloro-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide H~CI
N N
O
N
330mg (1.4 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazole-3-amine are dissolved in 5 ml of 1,2-dichloroethane and cooled to 0 C. At this temperature, 293 l (2.1 mmol) of triethylamine and 145 l (1.8 mmol) of chloroacetyl chloride are added. Cooling is removed, and the mixture is stirred for a further 2 h. The mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed twice with water, and the organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 191 mg (44% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.40 inin MS (DClpos): m/z = 312 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.4 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.6 (m, 4H), 7.3 (m, 4H), 4.2 (s, 2H).
Example 5A
2-N-(1,4-Diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)-Nz-isopropylglycinamide H3C.
~-CH3 H__(- N
N H
N- O
N
188 mg (0.6 mmol) of 2-chloro-N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide are dissolved in 4 ml of acetonitrile, and 288 mg (4.8 mmol) of isopropylamine are added. The mixture is heated at 50 C
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries for 16 h and then diluted with dichloromethane. The mixture is washed twice with water, and the organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC
using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 140 mg (71 % of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): Rr= 3.97 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 335 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.85 (s, 1H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.6 (m, 4H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.8 (m, ] H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
The aminopyrazoles of the table below are prepared analogously to example 3A.
In example 7A, the starting material used in place of the tosylate is the ethylate.
Example Structure Characterization MS (ES[pos): m/z = 254 (M+H)+
6A N_ HPLC (method 1): R, = 5.70 min.
/
F 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.6 (d, I H), 8.8 (s, I H), 8.1 (d, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.3-7.5 (in, 9H), 7.1 (t, l H).
NHz LC-MS (inethod 3): R, = 2.99 min N-o MS (ESIpos): m/z = 269 (M+H)+
8A N_ NH2 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.62 min.
N
CI 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 8.6 (s, ] H), 7.75 (d, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.1 (t, I H), 5.2 (s, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESIpos): m/z = 237 (M+H)+
9A N N HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.81 min.
U N
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 8.6 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (d, I H), 7.2-7.9 (m, 8H), 5.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 237 (M+H)+
IOA NH2 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.40 min.
N-~ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 9.0 (s, 1 H), 8.7 (s, 1 H), 8.4 (m, 1 H), 8.1 (m, I H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.45 (m, 1 H), 7.4 (t, 2H), 7.2 (t, 1 H), 5.3 (s, 2H).
The chloroacetaminoaminopyrazoles of the table below are prepared analogously to example 4A.
Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 330 (M+H)+
H CI
11A N~ HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.47 min.
N- O
N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 10.3 (s, F 1 H), 8.9 (s, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 4H), 7.3 (t, I H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESipos): m/z = 342 (M+H)+
H--CI
12A N_ O HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.40 min.
N
O 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 10.3 (s, CH 1 H), 8.8 (s, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.5 (m, 4H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 7.0 (d, 2H), 4.3 (s, 2H), 3 .8 (s, 3 H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 346 (M+H)+
H CI
13A N__~- HPLC (method 1): Rt = 4.66 min.
N- O
N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8 = 10.4 (s, CI 1H), 8.9 (s, 1H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.3-7.6 (m, 7H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 313 (M+H)+
14A N~CI HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.15 min.
N O
~ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S = 10.4 (s, ~ 1 H), 8.9 (s, l H), 8.5 (d, 1 H), 8.0 (t, 1 H), 7.9 (d, I H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 3H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 313 (M+H)+
15A N~CI HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.52 min.
N- O
N~ N/ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.4 (s, l H), 9.1 (d, 1 H), 9.0 (s, 1 H), 8.6 (d, 1 H), 8.2 (dd, IH), 7.6 (m, 3H), 7.4 (t, 2H), 7.3 (t, 1H), 4.3 (s, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The 3-[(N-isopropylglycyl)amino]-1-phenyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylates of the table below are prepared analogously to example 5A.
Example Structure Characterization MS (ESIpos): m/z = 353 (M+H)+
16A ~-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.04 min.
H N
N H
N_ p 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.8 \ N/ (s, I H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, F i 4H), 7.3 (t, 1H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
H3C MS (ESIpos): m/z = 365 (M+H)+
17A H__CN >-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.00 min.
N H
N- 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 8.8 N
(s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.5 (m, 4H), 7.3 (t, CH 1H), 6.95 (d, 2H), 3.8 (s, 3H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 3 2.7 (m, I H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 369 (M+H)+
18A CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.18 min.
~
H N
N H
N_ 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.9 \ N (s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.4-7.8 (m, 6H), 7.3 ci (t, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
MS (ESipos): m/z = 336 (M+H)+
~-CH3 19A HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.77 min.
H N
N H
N_ 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 8.9 N /
~ N (s, 1 H), 8.5 (d, 1 H), 8.0 (t, 1 H), 7.9 (d, ~ 1 H), 7.6 (d, 2H), 7.4 (m, 3H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 336 (M+H)+
20A ~_CHs HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.20 min.
HN
N H
N_ ~ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 9.1 N/ ~ (d, 1 H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 8.5 (d, 1 H), 8.2 (m, 1 H), 7.6 (m, 3H), 7.4 (t, 2H), 7.3 (t, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 2H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 1.0 (d, 6H).
Example 21A
Ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pent-4-enoate 0 \___CH
H3C,o Under an atmosphere of argon, 5.00 g (22.30 mmol) of ethyl (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetate are dissolved in dry tetrahydrofuran and cooled to -78 C. Over a period of 30 min, 28.98 ml (5.32 g, 28.98 mmol) of a I M solution of sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide in tetrahydrofuran are added dropwise. By occasional addition of dry tetrahydrofuran, the suspension is kept stirrable. The suspension is stirred at -78 C for I h, and 2.89 ml (4.05 g, 33.44 mmol) of 3-bromoprop-l-ene are then added dropwise. The reaction solution is stirred at -20 C for 2 h, and aqueous saturated ammonium chloride solution, water and a hexane/diethyl ether mixture are then added. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with a hexane/diethyl ether mixture. The combined organic phases are washed with water and aqueous saturated sodium chloride solution.
After drying, the solvent is removed on a rotary evaporator. Without further work-up, 6.33 g (64% of theory) of the desired product are obtained.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.61 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 282 (M+NH4)+
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 6.94-6.68 (m, 3H), 5.78-5.43 (m, 1H), 5.11-4.92 (m, 2H), 4.14-3.95 (m, 2H), 3.78-3.67 (m, 6H), 3.67-3.58 (m, ] H), 2.75-2.32 (m, 2H), 1.17-1.05 (m, 3H).
Example 22A
Ethyl 2-(),4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoate H
~
H3c~ ~ ~~CH3 O
H3C,0 6.33 g(23.95 mmol) of ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pent-4-enoate are dissolved in 67 ml of dry dichloromethane and cooled to -78 C. Ozone is passed through the solution until the starting material has been consumed. Oxygen is then passed through the solution, and 7.03 ml of dimethyl sulfide are added. The reaction inixture is allowed to warm to room temperature overnight and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure in vacuo using a rotary evaporator. The residue is purified by flash chromatography. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 1.48 g(23% of theory) of the desired product.
GC-MS (method 1): R,= 6.83 min GC-MS (method 1) (El): m/z = 266 (M)+
Example 23A
Methyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl]acetate N O
\
A little at a time, 2.85 g (43.56 mmol) of zinc are added to a solution, cooled to 0 C, of 1.16 g (4.36 mmol) of ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoate and 601.6 mg (4.79 mmol) of methyl glycinate hydrochloride in 32.5 ml of glacial acetic acid. The mixture is boiled under reflux BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries for 4 h, and the solution is then allowed to cool. Chloroform is added, the mixture is filtered and the filter cake is washed with ethanol/chloroform (1:1). With gentle heating, the filtrate is concentrated under reduced pressure using a rotary evaporator. The residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate, and the insoluble particles are filtered off. The filtrate is concentrated to dryness with gentle heating under reduced pressure using a rotary evaporator, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography. This gives 900 mg (26% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.49 min MS (ES+): m/z = 294 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 6.93-6.72 (m, 3H), 4.12 (dd, J= 23.0, 17.6 Hz, 2H), 3.76-3.70 (m, 6H), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.63-3.40 (m, 3H), 2.50-1.93 (m, 2H, partially obscured by the DMSO
signal).
Example 24A
[3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetic acid O
H3C0 / \ N
~OH
- O
O
912.1 mg (3.11 mmol) of methyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetate are dissolved in 15 ml of tetrahydrofuran, and 15 ml of an aqueous IN lithium hydroxide solution are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3 h and acidified with aqueous 6N
hydrochloric acid, aqueous saturated ainmonium chloride solution is added and the mixture is extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases are dried over sodium sulfate and, under reduced pressure and with gentle heating, evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator.
Without further work-up, 637 mg (73% of theory) of the desired product are obtained.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 3.23 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 297.1 (m+NHq)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 12.87 (br s, 1H), 6.92-6.72 (m, 3H), 4.00 (dd, J= 29.1, 17.6 Hz, 2H), 3.77-3.68 (m, 6H), 3.62-3.38 (m, 3H), 2.49-1.89 (partially obscured by the DMSO signal, m, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 25A
1-Iodoacetone O
I
4.34 ml (5.00 g, 54.04 mmol) of chloroacetone are dissolved in 10 ml of acetone, and 9.87 g (59.44 mmol) of potassium iodide are added. After 1.5 h of stirring at room temperature, the solid is filtered off with suction and washed with acetone. The mother liquor is concentrated to dryness with gentle heating and under a slight vacuum using a rotary evaporator. The residue is reacted further without further purification.
GC-MS (method 1): R, = 2.07 min GC-MS (method 1, El+): m/z = 184.0 (M)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 4.03 (s, 2H), 2.30 (s, 3H).
Example 26A
2-(E/Z)-1-iodoacetone O-benzyl oxime NO
I
8.375 g (45.52 mmol) of 1-iodoacetone and 5.61 g (45.52 mmol) of O-benzylhydroxylamine are dissolved in methanol/water (45 ml/14 ml) and stirred at room temperature for I h. The solvent is concentrated under reduced pressure, using a rotary evaporator, to a volume of 15 ml, and dichloromethane and water are added. The aqueous phase is extracted three times with dichloromethane, and the organic phases are combined. After drying over sodium sulfate, the solvent is removed and the residue is purified by flash chromatography. This gives 8.88 g (65% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.85 and 4.95 min MS (ES+): m/z = 290 (M+H)+
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6, isomer mixture): S= 7.42-7.42 (m, 10H), 5.10 (s, 2H), 5.06 (s, 2H), 4.00 (s, 2H), 3.90 (s, 2H), 1.95 (s, 3H), 1.93 (s, 3H).
Example 27A
Ethyl 4-(E/Z)-4-[(benzyloxy)imino]-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pentanoate N~O
O
O
Under an atmosphere of argon, 4.50 ml (0.96 g, 8.99 mmol) of a 2M solution of lithium diisopropylamide in tetrahydrofuran are added dropwise to a solution, cooled to -78 C, of 1.55 mg (6.92 mmol) of ethyl 3,4-dimethoxyphenylacetate in 40 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran. The solution is allowed to warm to room temperature and then once more cooled to -78 C. A
solution of 2.00 g (6.92 mmol) of 2-(E/Z)-]-iodoacetone O-benzy] oxime in 9 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran is added dropwise, and the mixture is once more allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred under reflux for I h. The solvent is then removed, and the residue is purified by flash chromatography.
The product fractions are combined and dried under reduced pressure. This gives 2.10 g (65% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.87 and 4.97 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 386 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6, isomer mixture): S= 7.39-7.22 (m, 5H), 6.92-6.65 (m, 3H), 5.01-4.91 (m, 2H), 4.12-3.82 (m, 3H), 3.74-3.63 (m, 6H), 2.99-2.76 (m, 1H), 2.56-2.44 (m, 1H, obscured by the DMSO signal), 1.83-1.59 (m, 3H), 1.16-1.04 (m, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 28A
3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methylpyrrolidin-2-one O ~ O
1 ~ 1HNH
O
500 mg (1.30 mmol) of ethyl-4-(E/Z)-4-[(benzyloxy)imino]-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)pentanoate are dissolved in 300 ml of methanol, and 1.52 g of a 50% strength Raney nickel suspension in water are added. The reaction suspension is hydrogenated at 2.5 bar and room temperature overnight. The catalyst is removed by filtration through Celite , and the solution is evaporated to dryness. The residue is separated by preparative HPLC, and the product fractions are combined.
Drying under high vacuum gives 204 mg (67% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 3.37 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 236 (M+H)+
I H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 7.83 (s, 1H), 6.91-6.69 (m, 3H), 3.75-3.69 (m, 6H), 3.67-3.46 (m, 2H), 2.60-2.45 (m, I H obscured by the DMSO signal), 2.28-1.98 (m, l H), 1.17 (t, J= 5.9 Hz, 3H).
Example 29A
tert-Butyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetate O O
N ~O CH3 OOH~
Under an atmosphere of argon, 289.0 mg (1.23 mmol) of 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-methylpyrrolidin-2-one are dissolved in dry 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, and 58.95 mg (1.47 mmol) of a 60% strength sodium hydride suspension are added. After 10 min of stirring at room temperature, 362.75 pl (479.19 mg, 2.46 mmol) of tert-butyl bromoacetate are added. A strongly BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries exothermic reaction sets in. After a further 20 min at room temperature, the reaction is quenched with water, and the reaction mixture is separated without further work-up by preparative HPLC.
The product fractions are combined, and the solvent is removed under reduced pressure with gentle heating. This gives 147 mg (34% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.27 min MS (ES+): m/z = 350.0 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 6.92-6.71 (m, 3H), 4.15-3.99 (m, IH), 3.89-3.54 (m, 9H), 2.68-1.51 (m, 2H), 1.42 (s, 9H), 1.25-1.15 (m, 3H).
Example 30A
3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl]acetic acid O
1 ~ N
O OH
270 mg (0.77 mmol) of tert-butyl [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-1-yl]acetate are dissolved in 7.5 ml of a 4M solution of hydrogen chloride in dioxane/water and stirred at room temperature for 1.5 h. The solution is concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure with gentle warming using a rotary evaporator, and the residue is dissolved in 2 ml of water and 10 ml of ethyl acetate. The solution is stirred vigorously for 5 min. The solution is dried on an EXtrelut -NT3 column, and the column is repeatedly washed with ethyl acetate. The solution is concentrated under reduced pressure in vacuo and with gentle heating using a rotary evaporator. Without further work-up, 205 mg (78% of theory) of product are obtained.
HPLC (method 1): Rr= 3.41 min MS (ES-): m/z = 292.1 (M-H)-'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.71 (br s, I H), 6.94-6.68 (m, 3H), 4.24-3.43 (m, l OH), 2.70-1.49 (m, 2H), 1.30-1.12 (m,3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 31A
4-tert-Butyl 1-ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)succinate O
O
O O
H3c-x H3C C;H3 Under an atmosphere of argon, 28.98 ml (10.63 g, 57.97 mmol) of a 2M solution of sodium hexamethylenedisilazane in tetrahydrofuran are added dropwise to a solution, cooled to -78 C, of 10.0 g (44.59 mmol) of ethyl (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetate in 50 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran. To avoid solidification of the reaction solution, a further 30 ml of dry tetrahydrofuran are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at -78 C for I h, and 9.88 ml (13.05 g, 66.89 mmol) of tert-butyl bromoacetate are then added. The solution is stirred at -20 C for 2 h and then warmed to room temperature overnight. A saturated aqueous ammonium chloride solution, water and a 1:1 mixture of hexane and diethyl ether are then added. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with 1:1 hexane/diethyl ether. The combined organic phases are washed successively with water and aqueous saturated sodium chloride solution, dried, filtered and then evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure using a rotary evaporator. The residue is separated by flash chromatography. The product fractions are combined, the solvent is removed and the residue is dried under high vacuum.
This gives 13.7 g(73% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.72 min MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 356 (M+NH4)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 6.92-6.73 (m, 3H), 4.11-3.97 (m, 2H), 3.92-3.84 (m, IH), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 2.98-2.87 (m, IH), 2.59-2.51 (m, 1H, obscured by the DMSO signal), 1.37 (s, 9H), 1.13 (t, J= 7.1 Hz, 3 H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 32A
4-tert-Butoxy-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid H 3 c p OH
iC O
4.0 g(11.82 mmol) of 4-tert-butyl I-ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)succinate are dissolved in 2.1 ml of methanol, and a solution of 82.92 mg (1.48 mmol) of potassium hydroxide in 2.1 ml of water is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight and then carefully neutralized using a 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid solution and diluted with an aqueous saturated ammonium chloride solution. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases are dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. Without further work-up, 376 mg (quantitative yield) of the desired product are obtained.
MS (DCI(NH3)): m/z = 328 (M+NH4)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.31 (br s, 1 H), 6.95-6.73 (m, 3H), 3.86-3.76 (m, l H), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.72 (s, 3H), 3.00-3.82 (m, 1 H), 2.57-2.45 (m, I H, obscured by the DMSO signal), 1.36 (s, 9H).
Example 33A
Ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl) -')-hydroxypropanoate O
O
H3C-O 0 \-CH3 4.0 g (13.4 mmol) of ethyl (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetate and 422 mg (13.4 mmol) of aqueous formaldehyde are dissolved in 13 ml of dimethylsulfonamide. 262 mg (0.77 mmol) of sodium ethoxide are added as a 20 percent by weight strength solution in ethanol.
After 30 min, acetic acid BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries is added until the mixture is acidic, and the mixture is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 1.9 g (56% of theory) of the product.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 6.9 (m, 2H), 6.8 (m, 1H), 5.0 (t, 1H), 4.1 (m, 2H), 3.9 (m, IH), 3.7 (d, 6H), 3.6 (m, 1H), 3.55 (m, 1H), 1.2 (t, 3H).
Example 34A
2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-3-hydroxypropanoic acid O
OH
300 mg (1.18 mmol) of ethyl 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-3-hydroxypropanoate are dissolved in 2 ml of a mixture of acetone and water, and 34 mg (1.42 mmol) of lithium hydroxide are added. The mixture is stirred at 50 C for I h, and another 8 mg (0.33 mmol) of lithium hydroxide are then added. After a further hour at 50 C, the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and acidified with dilute hydrochloric acid until it gives an acidic reaction. The organic phase is washed two more times with dilute hydrochloric acid and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 131 mg (49% of theory) of product.
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 244 (M+NH4)+
HPLC (method 1): R, = 2.83 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 12.3 (b, 1 H), 6.9 (m, 2H), 6.8 (m, 1 H), 4.6 (b, l H), 3.9 (t l H), 3.7 (d, 6H), 3 .5 (m, 2H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 35A
4-{[tert-Butyl(dimethyl)silyl]oxy}-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)butanoic acid O-Si\ CH3 OH
500 mg (2.55 mmol) of (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetic acid are dissolved in 25 ml of anhydrous tetrahydrofuran and cooled to -78 C. At this temperature, 1.17 g(6.37 mmol) of sodium hexamethylenedisilazane are added as a I M solution in tetrahydrofuran over a period of 10 min.
After the addition has ended, 670 mg (2.8 mmol) of 2-(bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane are added and the mixture is stirred at this temperature for a further 30 min, before cooling is removed.
After a further 16 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and acidified with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution until it gives an acidic reaction. The organic phase is washed two more times with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 361 mg (40% of theory) of product.
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 355 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.95 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.2 (b, IH), 6.9 (d, I H), 6.8 (m, 2H), 3.7 (s, 6H), 3.5 (m, 3H), 2.6 (s, 6H), 2.2 (m, I H), 1.8 (m, I H), 0.9 (s, 9H).
Example 36A
2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)pent-4-enoic acid CHZ
O
OH
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 5.0 g (25.5 mmol) of (3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)acetic acid are dissolved in 250 ml of anhydrous tetrahydrofuran and cooled to -78 C. At this temperature, 11.7 g(63.7 mmol) of sodium hexamethylenedisilazane, as a 1M solution in tetrahydrofuran, are added over a period of 10 min.
After the addition has ended, 3.4 g (28.0 mmol) of allyl bromide are added and the mixture is stirred at this temperature for a further 30 min, before cooling is removed.
After a further 16 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and acidified with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution until it gives an acidic reaction. The organic phase is washed two more times with five percent strength potassium bisulfate solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure.
The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 4.7 g (78% of theory) of product.
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 254 (M+NH4)+
HPLC (method 1): Rr = 3.85 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 12.2 (b, IH), 6.9 (m, 2H), 6.8 (m, 1H), 5.7 (m, 1H), 5.0 (m, 2H), 3.7 (d, 6H), 3.5 (t, l H), 2.7 (m, 1 H), 2.4 (m, 1 H).
Example 37A
tert-Butyl 3-{2-[{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}(isopropyl)amino]-2-oxoethyl } piperidine- l -carboxylate O ~ /
H 3C ~N N~ ~ ~
C H 3 O HC CH ~ N
N
120 mg (0.36 mmol) of2-N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-NZ-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 5 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 96 mg (0.4 mmol) of 1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)piperidin-3-yl]acetic acid, 5.5 mg (0.04 mmol) of 1-hydroxy-lH-benzotriazole and 76 mg (0.4 mmol) of l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride are added. The reaction solution is BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC
using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 186 mg (92% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 5.04 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 560 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.8-10.2 (m, 1 H), 8.9 (b, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.2-7.7 (m, 8H), 3.6-4.6 (m, 5H), 0.9-2.9 (m, 23H).
Example 38A
tert-Butyl (2R)-2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-l-carboxylate ~-CH3 O
O
N p C>_~
NH
N-N ~ \\
lo 103 mg (0.44 mmol) of l,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazole-3-amine and 94 mg (0.44 mmol) of 1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-D-proline are dissolved in 4 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 381 pl of diisopropylethylamine and 250 mg (0.66 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, giving 61 mg (32%
of theory) of product.
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 433 (M+H)+
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 3.74 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 10.0 (d, I H), 8.7 (s, I H), 7.2-7.8 (m, I OH), 4.2-4,4 (m, 2H), BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 3.2 -3.4 (m, 2H), 2.1-2.3 (m, lH),1.8-2.0 (m, 2H)1.3-1.5 (m, 9H).
Example 39A
tert-Butyl (4S)-4-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)carbamoyl]-1,3-thiazolidine-3-carboxylate H 3C _~-CH
O
O
N O
S '-/`~
NH
N-N ~ \\
50 mg (0.21 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-amine and 50 mg (0.21 mmol) of (R)-N-(t-butylcarbonyl)thiazolidine-4-carboxylic acid are dissolved in 5 ml of dichloromethane, and 185 pi of diisopropylethylamine and 121 mg (0.32 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, giving 29 mg (30%
of theory) of product.
MS (ESipos): m/z = 451 (M+H)+
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 3.82 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 10.1 (b, IH), 8.8 (s, IH), 7.2-7.8 (m, IOH), 4.6-4,8 (m, IH), 4.6 (d, l H), 4.4 (d, 1 H), 4.6 (d, 1 H), 3.4-3.6 (m, 2H), 1.4-1.5 (b, 9H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 40A
Methoxy(4-methoxyphenyl)acetic acid H3C.\ _ O-CH3 O
O
HO
2 g (14.7 mmol) of 4-methoxybenzaldehyde are dissolved in 10 ml of methanol, and 4.5 g (17.6 mmol) of bromoform are added. A solution of 4.1 g (73.4 mmol) of potassium hydroxide in ml of methanol is added dropwise to this solution such that the temperature of the reaction mixture does not exceed 5 C. After the addition has ended, cooling is removed and the mixture is stirred for a further 16 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with 30 ml of water and extracted with dichloromethane. The aqueous phase is adjusted to an acidic pH and likewise extracted repeatedly 10 with dichloromethane. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by preparative HPLC using a gradient of water and acetonitrile.
The product-containing fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 2.3 g (82% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method l): R,= 3.31 min MS (DClpos): mlz = 151 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 12.8 (b, 1 H), 7.3 (d, 2H), 6.9 (d, 2H), 4.7 (s, IH), 3.7 (s, 3H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
The phenylacetic acids of the table below are prepared analogously to example 24A.
Example Structure Characterization MS (EStneg): m/z = 229 (M-H)-CI
41A H3C \ O-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.70 min.
O
0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.8 (b, HO 1 H), 7.4 (s, 1 H), 6.8 (d, l H), 7.15 (d, 1 H), 4.7 (s, I H), 3 .9 (s, 3H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESIpos): m/z = 244 (M+H)+
42A 0 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.12 min.
H3C\ - O-CH3 0 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 12.8 (b, HO 1H),6.9(m,3H),4.7(s, 1H),3.8(s,3H),3.3 (s, 3H).
MS (ESipos): m/z = 202 (M+H)+
43A - O-CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.38 min.
F \ /
O 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 12.9 (b, HO
1 H), 7.45 (m, 2H), 7,2 (m, 2H), 4.8 (s, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
MS (ESIneg): m/z = 199 (M-H)-44A HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.71 min.
O
HO 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 = 12.9 (b, 1 H), 7.4 (q, 4H), 4.8 (s, 1 H), 3.3 (s, 3H).
Example 45A
(2R)-1-tert-Butyl 2-methyl 5-methoxypyrrol idine-1,2-dicarboxylate H3CII~ 0 N OCH
O OO
H3C~-CH3 8.20 g(35.8 mmol) of Boc-D-proline methyl ester are dissolved in 70 ml of methanol, 1.00 g (3.3 mmol) of tetraethylammonium para-toluenesulfonate is added and the mixture is, in a jacketed electrochemical cell with argon as protective gas, cooled to 5 C
using a circulation BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries cryostat. The cell is provided with two graphite electrodes (dimensions about 1.0 x 1.0 x 0.25 cm) which are positioned at a distance to one another of about 2 cm. For 20 h, a constant current of about 250 mA (about 5F/mol) is passed through these electrodes. The reaction solution is introduced into 500 ml of diethyl ether, whereupon the conducting salt precipitates as an oil and can be removed. The organic phase is washed with water and saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. This gives 9.00 g (97% of theory) of crude product which is used without further purification in the next step.
GC-MS (method 1): R,= 5.05 min; m/z = 158 (M-Boc+H)+.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 4.15-4.02 (m, 3H), 3.87-3.76 (m, 1H), 2.30-2.20 (m, 1H), 2.06-1.90 (m, IH), 1.90-1.76 (m, 1H), 1.42-1.30 (m, 9H), 1.21-0.95 (m, 6H).
Example 46A
(2R,5S)-l -tert-Butyl 2-methyl 5-methylpyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate " " "'' ON, H
3C N lfr CH 3 H I~ 3\i -~-CH3 In an apparatus which has been dried by heating, under an atmosphere of argon, 12.62 g (61.4 mmol) of copper bromide/dimethyl sulfide complex are initially charged in 225 ml of absolute diethyl ether, and the mixture is cooled to -50 C. 38.0 ml of methyllithium (60.8 mmol, 1.6 molar solution diethyl ether) are then added dropwise. The mixture is stirred at -45 C to -35 C
for 30 min, and 9.75 ml (92.1 mmol) of boron trifluoride diethyl etherate are then added dropwise.
The mixture is stirred at -45 C for a further 15 min, and 9.00 g (34.7 mmol) of (2R)-1-tert-butyl 2-methyl 5-methoxypyrrolidine-l,2-dicarboxylate are then added dropwise. The reaction solution is slowly thawed overnight. 60 ml of conc. ammonia solution are added, and the reaction mixture is stirred for a further 30 min. The reaction mixture is filtered through Kieselgur, the filter cake is washed with dichloromethane and the phases of the combined filtrates are separated. The organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated. The product is separated on silica gel using cyclohexane/ethyl acetate 6/1. This gives 53 g (62% of theory) of considerably diastereomerically enriched (dr z 9:1) product.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries LC-MS (method 2): R,= 3.51 min; m/z = 144 (M-Boc+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 4.22-4.15 (m, 1 H), 4.02-3.87 (m, I H), 3.67-3.58 (m, 3 H), 2.36-2.19 (m, 1 H), 2.05-1.88 (m, 1 H), 1.87-1.75 (m, I H), 1.57-1.45 (m, 1 H), 1.44-1.29 (m, 9 H), 1.13-1.06 (m, 3 H) Example 47A
(2R, 5S)-1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl )-5-methy lpro l i ne .'0 ',, OH
H 3C N ~
H3C~-CH3 In 40 ml of water/dioxane (1/1), 2.72 g (64.7 mmol) of lithium hydroxide monohydrate are added to 5.25 g (21.6 mmol) of (2R,5S)-1-tert-butyl 2-methyl 5-methylpyrrolidine-1,2-dicarboxylate, and the mixture is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is concentrated under reduced pressure, and 50 ml of saturated ammonium chloride solution are added. The pH is carefully adjusted to 2-3 using dilute hydrochloric acid, and the mixture is extracted three times with in each case 50 ml of ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases are washed with saturated sodium chloride solution, dried over magnesium sulfate and concentrated. Evaporation gives 4.50 g (89%
of theory) of (2R,5S)-1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-5-methylproline in a diastereomer ratio of dr = 9:1.
LC-MS (method 2): R,= 3.06 min; m/z - 228.0 (M-H)+.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-db): 8= 4.23-4.14 (m, I H), 4.03-3.86 (m, I H), 3.35-3.31 (s, I H), 2.37-2.18 (m, I H), 2.04-1.90 (m, I H), 1.87-1.74 (m, I H), 1.58-1.46 (m, I
H), 1.43-1.28 (m, 9 H), 1.13-1.07 (m, 3 H).
BHC 06 1 l 68-Foreign Countries Example 48A
tert-Butyl (2R,5S)-2-{[4-(4-fluorophenyl)-l-phenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl]carbamoyl}-methylpyrrolidine-l-carboxylate F
H
N
H N ''r CH
209 mg (0.910 mmol) of example 47A and 242 mg (0.827 mmol) of example I lA are dissolved in ml of dichloromethane, and 472 mg (1.241 mmol) of HATU and 0.43 ml (2.482 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine are added. The mixture is stirred in a microwave oven at 80 C for 3 h, and the reaction solution is then purified directly chromatographically by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to 10 dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 43 mg (10% of theory) of product..
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 2.44 min; m/z = 465.4 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 10.0 (b, IH), 8.8 (b, 1H), 7.5-7.6 (m, 4H), 7.1-7.4 (m, 3H), 4.3 (dd, 1H), 3.9-4.0 (m, 1H), 1.4-2.3 (m, 4H), 1.4 (b, 9H), 1.1-1.2 (m, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 49A
tert-Butyl (2R,5S)-2-{[1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl]carbamoyl}-5-methylpyrrolidine-1-carboxylate \
/
H
N
H N 'I I
~O D N-N
O
369 mg (1.57 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-IH-pyrazole-3-amine and 359 mg (1.57 mmol) of (2R,5S)-1-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-5-methylproline are dissolved in 15 ml of dichloromethane, and 819 pl of diisopropylethylamine and 894 mg (2.35 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate are added. The reaction mixture is stirred in a pressure-proof glass vial in a microwave oven at 80 C for 60 minutes and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure, giving 178 mg (24% of theory) of product.
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 447 (M+H)+
LC-MS (method 3): R, = 3.90 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.07-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.8 (s, IH), 7.91-7.81 (m, 2H), 7.62-7.18 (m, 7H), 4.41-4.26 (m, 1 H), 4.03-3.85 (m, l H), 2.39-1.8 (m, 3H), 1.55-1.46 (m, l H), 1.43-1.33 (br, 9H), 1.3-1.04 (m, 4H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Exemplary embodiments Example 1 NZ [(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)acetyl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-l H-pyrazol-3-yl)-NZ-isopropylglycinamide I \
o ~
~ I 0 H
H3C"
p \ NN ~ NH
60 mg (0.18 mmol) of 2-N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 3 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 40 mg (0.2 mmol) of 3,4-dimethoxyphenylacetic acid, 2.4 mg (0.02 mmol) of 1-hydroxy-1 H-benzotriazole and 38 mg (0.2 mmol) of 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride are added. The reaction solution is stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then purified chromatographically by preparative HPLC
using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 84 mg (92% of theory) of product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.56 min MS (DClpos): m/z = 513 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): b= 10.0 (b, IH), 8.9 (b, IH), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.5-7.7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.6-6.9 (m, 3H), 3.4-4.6 (m, I IH), 1.0 (b, 6H).
The examples of the table below are prepared analogously to Example 1 using the suitable amine and the suitable carboxylic acid. Also suitable for use as coupling agents are N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[ 1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methyl-methanaminium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) or (1H-benzotriazol-l-yloxy)(tripyrrolidin-l-yl)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization O-CH MS (ESIpos): m/z = 557 (M+H)+
CH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.62 min.
O O /
H
H3C' 0 N~^yN
CH b'J"CHO N-N
~ MS (ESlpos): m/z = 527 (M+H)+
H3C.10 0 H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.73 min.
H3C, 0 N^ /N
TI I( 3 CH O NI~ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO db): S=
H3b CH3 N
10.0 (s, l H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.8 (m, 2H), \/ 7.7 (d, 1H), 7.5 (m, 3H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.8 (m, 3H), 3.8-4.6 (m, 4H), 3.7 (s, 6H), 0.6-1.4 (m, 9H).
MS ( ESlpos): m/z = 547 (M+H)+
I
u O H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.77 min.
CH3 R~\
CI N~N 4 ~O ~ O _N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
H3C H3C CH3 10.0 (s, 1H), 8.9 (s, 1H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.1-7.7 (m, 11H), 4.0-5.2 (m, 4H), 3.7(s,3H),33(s,3H),0.6-1.1 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization p~CH MS (ESIpos): m/z = 573 (M+H)+
oH3 HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.45 min.
O ~
H3C\ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 ~ I~ 10.0 (s, I H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (d, 2H), H3C "0 H3C ^CH~ N-N
7.5-7.7 (m, 4H), 7.3 (q, 1 H), 6.8-7.0 (m, 5H), 3.0-5.1 (m, 16H), 0.8-1.1 (m, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 497 (M+H)+
H3C.10 \
~ H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.92 min.
HC / NN \
6 ~ O NI~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
H3C C H 10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (s, IH), 6.8-7.9 (m, 12H), 3.4-4.7 (m, 8H), 2.1 (s, 3H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
SIpos): m/z = 517 (M+H)+
i H3 R~\ MS (E
~
N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.77 min.
K
CI ~~ 7 H C CH~ N-N 'H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO d6): 8=
3 3 10.0 (s, IH), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.0-7.9 (m, 13H), 3.4-4.7 (m, 8H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
~ MS (ESlpos): m/z = 542 (M+H)+
H3C ~ 1)--r H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.54 min.
H3C' C N^ /N
8 /O ~ ~IOI( N~\
N
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 513 (M+H)+
H3C'0 IC O N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.70 min.
N
9 ~O 0 NI-CH3 R~\ MS (ESlpos): m/z 499 (M+H)+
/ O \ I N HPLC (method 1): R, 4.38 min.
HO N~ 10 O _N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6=
H3C CH3 10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.9 (s, 1 H), 7.0-7.9 (m, l) H), 3.4-4.7 (m, 8H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 528 (M+H)+
H3C- 0 Klr C H HPLC (method l): R, = 4.03 min.
H3C~O N~N
ll CH3 ~ o NI~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
10.0 (s, I H), 9.2 (s, I H), 8.9 (s, I H), N 8.6 (m, l H), 8.2 (m, 1 H), 7.7 (d, l H)>
7.6 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 3H), 6.7-6.9 (m, 3H), 4.7-4.7 (m, 4H), 3.7 (s, 6H), 0.9-1.4 (m, 9H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 531 (M+H)+
H3C~0 ~
H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.61 min.
H3C' 0 N N
12 ~O NI~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6=
10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (m, 2H), 7.5-7.7 (dd, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 5H), 6.6-6.9 (m, 3H), 3.4-4.6 (m, l 1 H), F
1.0 (b, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Forei~n Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESipos): m/z = 515 (M+H)+
O
H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.68 min.
N
O
13 H3CCH0 N,N
O
MS (ESlpos): m/z 561 (M+H)+
3H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.57 min.
H3C, 0 N~N
R,\
14 O ~ O H3C H3C CH3 N
F
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 544 (M+H)+
H3C I O H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.32 min.
H3C, N
0 N 15 O Jl TIOIf NN
cII) MS (ESipos): m/z = 501 (M+H)+
O /
H N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.54 min.
N
O
16 H3C1-1~ CH0 NN
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization - MS (ESIpos): m/z = 501 (M+H)+
H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.80 min.
F 10-i O ~ /
N^ N
17 ~0 /" OIf NI N
\
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 514 (M+H)+
H3C K)-"A O H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.35 min.
H3C'0 N_~,-yN
18 O N~\
bN-CH O'CH3 MS (ESIpos): m/z = 483 (M+H)+
H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.76 min.
N N
19 ~
\
H3C " H3CCH~ N~N
~
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 514 (M+H)+
H3C~ O
H HPLC (method 1): R, = 3.90 min.
H3C,0 N^ N
20 ~OIf N_ N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
b1\ 10.0 (s, 1 H), 9.1 (s, I H), 9.0 (s, I H), N 8.5 (m, I H), 8.2 (m, 1 H), 7.5-7.7 (m, 3H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 3H), 6.6-6.9 (m, H), 3.5-4.6 (m, 11 H), 1.0 (b, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 517 (M+H)+
CI lc~ ~ HPLC (method 1): Rr = 4.98 min.
N
21 O ~ O NN
H3C~ H 3 C CH3 MS (ESIpos): m/z = 475 (M+H)+
O
N HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.45 min.
N
~ MS (ESIpos): m/z = 544 (M+H)+
H3C I O H HPLC (method 1): Rt = 3.87 min.
H3C, N
0 N^
23 'OO N~ 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8 H =
~ 12.6-12.8 (m, I H), 9.6-9.9 (m, 1 H), \/ N 7.6-7.8 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.5-6.9 9 (m, 4H), 3.6-4.8 (m, l 1 H), 1.0 (m, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 521 (M+H)+
CI /
~ O H HPLC (method 1): Rr = 5.03 min.
CI \ N N
b BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 475 (M+H)+
~ ~ H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.40 min.
N N
H3~L CH3 -N
b CH3 MS (ESIpos): m/z = 483 (M+H)+
H HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.75 min.
H3C~0 N ^I{ /N
26 O ~IO NI~
H3C~ H3C CH3 N
LC-MS (method 1): R, = 1.97 min O
H
N
~
27 O N_ $H3CI CH3 N
6______N
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 28 N-(1,4-Diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropyl-N2-(piperidin-3-ylacetyl)glycinamide O R--100 mg (0.18 mmol) of tert-butyl3-{2-[{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}-(isopropyl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}piperidine-l-carboxylate are dissolved in 4 ml of dichloromethane and 407 mg (3.57 mmol) of trifluoroacetic acid are added a little at a time.
After 2 h, the mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed repeatedly with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution, and the organic phase is dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 80 mg (97% of theory) of product.
LC-MS (method 1): R, = 1.47 min 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 9.8-10.2 (m, 1H), 8.9 (b, 1H), 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.2-7.7 (m, 9H), 3.8-4.6 (m, 4H), 0.9-3.4 (m, 16H).
Example 29 2-[3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide ~
~ I
H3 c N L/JN
0 N_N
O
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries 115 mg (0.41 mmol) of [3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetic acid, 116.26mg (0.49 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazole-3-amine and 215.2 l (159.65 mg, 1.24 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine are dissolved in 4.2 ml of dry dichloromethane. 321.41 mg (0.62 mmol) of PYBOP are added, and the mixture is stirred at a bath temperature of 65 C
overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture is concentrated using a rotary evaporator, dissolved in water and acetonitrile and purified by preparative HPLC. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 78 mg (38% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 2): Rt= 4.35 min MS (ES+): m/z = 497 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 10.13 (br s, 1 H), 8.88 (s, 1 H), 7.94-6.70 (m, 13H), 4.26-4.01 (m, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 3.67 (s, 3H), 3.65-3.40 (m, 3H), 2.50-2.38 (m, 1H), 2.05-1.90 (m, 1H).
Example 30 2-[3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)acetamide i ~ I
O
O N-N
100mg (0.34 mmol) of 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-5-methyl-2-oxopyrrolidin-l-yl]acetic acid, 106.95 mg (0.41 mmol) of 1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-amine and 178.15 pl (132.19 mg, 1.02 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine are dissolved in 3.5 ml of dry dichloromethane.
266.12 mg (0.51 mmol) of PYBOP are added, and the mixture is stirred at a bath temperature of 65 C overnight. After cooling, the reaction mixture is concentrated using a rotary evaporator, coevaporated with toluene, dissolved in water and acetonitrile and purified by preparative HPLC.
The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 30 mg (17% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.37 min BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries MS (ES+): m/z = 511 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 8.9 (b, I H), 8.0 (s, I H), 7.65 (d, 2H), 7.2-7.5 (m, 8H), 6.8 (m, 3H), 4.15-4.4 (b, IH), 4.0 (b, IH), 3.7-3.9 (m, 5H), 2.7 (m, IH), 2.4 (b, IH), 2.2 (b, IH), 1.7 (b, 2H), 1.3 (m, 3H).
Example 31 tert-Butyl 3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-[ { 2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3 -yl )am i no]-2-oxoethyl }-(isopropyl)amino]-4-oxobutanoate H3c" o H3c/o o \ I N
N~
O H3CCH O N,N
H3c o b ~
CH3 250.0 mg (0.75 mmol) ofN-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 3.5 ml of dry N,N-dimethylformamide, and 255.20 mg (0.82 mmol) of 4-tert-butoxy-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-oxobutanoic acid, 397.94 mg (1.05 mmol) of HATU and 416.68 l (309.18 mg, 2.39 mmol) of N,N-diisopropylethylamine are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight. The solution is diluted with acetonitrile and water and purified by preparative HPLC. The product fractions are combined, and the solvent is removed. The residue is dried under high vacuum. This gives 363 mg (78% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): Rr= 4.97 min MS (ES+): m/z = 627 (M+H)+
' H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6= 10.08-9.76 (m, 1 H), 8.93-8.80 (m, I H), 7.93-6.61 (m, 13H), 4.63-3.42 (m, I OH), 2.92-2.64 (m, 1 H), 2.58-2.42 (m, 1 H), 1.44-0.55 (m, 15H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 32 3-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-4-[{2-[(l,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}(isopropyl)-amino]-4-oxobutanoic acid H3c~0 H3C"0 ~
H
N~
~ N
0 H3C CH ~ N
OH
310 mg (0.50 mmol) of tert-butyl3-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4-[{2-[(l,4-diphenyl-IH-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}(isopropyl)amino]-4-oxobutanoate are dissolved in 20 ml of a 4N solution of hydrogen chloride in dioxane and stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure with gentle heating, and the residue is separated by preparative HPLC. The product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness using a rotary evaporator. This gives 128 mg (45% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R, = 4.29 min MS (ES+): m/z = 571 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 12.09 (br s, I H), 10.04-9.80 (m, I H), 8.92-8.80 (m, I H), 7.93-6.65 (m, 13H), 4.65-3.40 (m, l OH), 3.01-2.76 (m, 1 H), 2.59-2.39 (m, 1 H
under the DMSO signal), 1.27-0.57 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 33 2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-N-{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl }-4-hydroxy-N-isopropylbutanamide H3C~o H3c /o o \ I N
N~
H CH O N--N
\
OH b 50 mg (0.15 mmol) of N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 2 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 58 mg (0.16 mmol) of 4-{[tert-butyl(dimethyl)silyl]oxy}-2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)butanoic acid, 33 l (0.19 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine and 85 mg (0.16 mmol) of PyBOP are added. The reaction solution is stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then diluted with dichloromethane. The mixture is washed twice with 5%
strength potassium bisulfate solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution, and the organic phase is dried and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. 0.3 ml of trifluoroacetic acid and a little dichloroinethane are added to the residue, after 5 min, the mixture is diluted with dichloromethane and washed once with IN aqueous sodium hydroxide solution and once with saturated sodium chloride solution and the organic phase is dried and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure.
The residue is separated by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water, and the product fractions are combined and concentrated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 51 mg (61 % of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.31 min MS (ES+): m/z = 557 (M+H)+
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 9.9 (m, 1 H), 8.9 (m, 1 H9, 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.7 (d, 1 H), 7.6 (m, 2H),7.2-7.4(m3H),6.7-6.9(m,3H),3.5-4.5(m,7H),3.4(s,6H),3.2(m,lH),2.1(m,2H),1.7 (m, 1 H), 0.6-1.2 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 34 2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)-N-{2-[(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl)amino]-2-oxoethyl}-3-hydroxy-N-isopropylpropanamide H3C~0 H3C~0 O
H
N/\/N
HO H C~CH IOI N~N
80 mg (0.26 mmol) of N-(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)-N2-isopropylglycinamide are dissolved in 2 ml of N,N-dimethylformamide, and 59 mg (0.26 mmol) of 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-3-hydroxypropanoic acid, 52 l (0.29 mmol) of diisopropylethylamine and 137 mg (0.26 mmol) of PyBOP are added. The reaction solution is stirred at room temperature for 16 h and then diluted with acetonitrile. The mixture is separated by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water, and the product fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 26 mg (20% of theory) of the desired product.
HPLC (method 1): R,= 4.29 min MS (ES+): m/z = 543 (M+H)+
I H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S= 10.0 (m, 1H), 8.9 (m, IH9, 7.9 (d, 2H), 7.7 (d, 1H), 7.6 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.4 (m 3H), 6.7-6.9 (m, 3H), 3.5-4.5 (m, 9H), 3.4 (s, 6H), 0.6-1.2 (m, 6H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example 35 1-[2-(3,4-Dimethoxyphenyl)propanoyl]-N-(1,4-diphenyl-1 H-pyrazol-3-yl )-D-prolinamide I \
/
O
CNN
~ N-N
H3c, o CH3 At 0 C, 1 ml of trifluoroacetic acid is added to a solution of 31 mg (0.07 mmol) of tert-butyl (2R)-2-[(1,4-diphenyl-lH-pyrazol-3-yl)carbamoyl]pyrrolidine-l-carboxylate in I ml of dichloromethane. The mixture is stirred at RT for 18 h and evaporated to dryness. 2.5 ml of DMF
are then added, followed by 16 mg (0.077 mmol) of 2-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)propionic acid, 61 l of diisopropylethylamine and 29 mg (0.077 mmol) of N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 18 hours and then chromatographed by preparative HPLC using a gradient of acetonitrile and water. The product-containing fractions are combined and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. This gives 30 mg (82% of theory) of product.
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 525 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 3): R, = 2.51 min.
'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8= 10.0 (d, l H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (b, 2H), 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (rn, 4H), 6.7-6.9 (m, 3H), 4.4-4.6 (m, 1 H), 3.8 -3.9 (m, IH), 3.7 (b, 6H), 3.1-3.3 (m ,2H) 1.7-2.2 (m, 4H).
The examples of the table below are prepared analogously to example 1(examples 36 and 37) or example 35 (examples 38 to 44) using the appropriate amine and the appropriate carboxylic acid.
Suitable for use as coupling agents are also N-[(dimethylamino)(3H-[1,2,3]triazolo[4,5-b]pyridin-3-yloxy)methylene]-N-methylmethanaminium hexafluorophosphate (HATU) or (1 H-benzotriazol-1-yloxy)(tripyrrolidin-l-yl)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate (PyBOP). In examples 41, 43 and 44, the TBDMS-protected alcohol is desilylated analogously to example 33.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 529 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 3): R, = 2.47 min.
36 ~H3 N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8=
/~\
N-N 10.1 (s, 1 H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (b, 2H), H3C\ ~ O
O O 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.7-- 6.9(m,3H),4.3-5.1(m,3H),3.6 -3.8 (m, 8H), 3.1-3.4 (m ,2H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 511 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 4): Rt = 3.38 min.
37 ~H3 N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S=
/
N-N 10.0 (s, 1 H), 8.8 (s, 1 H), 7.9 (b, 2H), H3C~0 \ I O O ~ 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 7.2-7.4 (m, 4H), 6.7-~
- 6.9 (m, 3H), 4.5-4.7 (m, IH), 3.5 -3.9 (m, 11 H), 1.7-2.2 (m, 6H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 555 (M+H)+
H 3 C HPLC (method 4): Rt = 3.28 min.
38 /F N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S=
H3C~ O O N~ ~ 10.07-9.89 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.76 (s, 1 H), N 7.93-7.78 (m, 2H), 7.65-7.16 (m, H3C-O ~ l OH), 4.44-4.26 (m, 1 H), 4.05-3.83 ~ (m, 1 H), 2.4-2.18 (m, 2H), 2.07-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.45 (m, IH), 1.44-1.35 (m, 9H), 1.28-1.03 (m, 4H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization ~ MS (ESIpos): m/z = 573 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 4): Rt = 2.48 min.
39 H 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S =
H3C N 10.05-9.89 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.78 (s, 1 H), H C"O 0 0 N-N 7.93-7.78 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.18 (m, 3 9H), 4.42-4.24 (m, IH), 4.03-3.82 / \ (m, 1H), 2.39-2.18 (m, 2H), 2.09-HsC~O 1.83 (m, 2H), 1.55-1.44 (m, IH), F 1.43-1.35 (m, 9H), 1.29-1.05 (m, O
~CH3 4H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 493 (M+H)+
HPLC (method 4): Rt = 2.27 min.
40 H 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): S=
H3C N ~ 10.06-9.89 (d, 1 H), 8.91-8.77 (s, 1 H), 0 0 N-N 7.91-7.81 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.19 (m, IOH), 4.41-4.26 (m, IH), 4.00-3.86 (m, 1 H), 2.39-2.2 (m, 1 H), 2.11-1.81 CH (m, 2H), 1.57-1.43 (m, IH), 1.42-I .36 (m, 8H), 1.27-1.02 (m, 4H). F LC-MS (method 1): Rr = 2.41 min;
HO m/z = 555.4 (M+H)+
41 NO 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 8 =
9.9-10.3 (m, IH), 8.8-8.9 (m, IH), H3C O H N \ \
~ N-N 7.8-7.9 (m, 2H), 7.5-7-7 (m, 4H), 6.9-H3C 7.4 (m, 6H), 3.9-4.6 (m, 3H), 3.0-3.3 2H), 1.4-2.4 (m, 12H), 0.9-1.3 (m, 3H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Example Structure Characterization MS (ESlpos): m/z = 559 (M+H)+
H3C HPLC (method 4): R, = 3.57 min.
42 IF N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 0 10.05-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.88-8.81 (s, IH), N~
N 7.91-7.8 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.17 (m, 9H), 4.4-4.26 (m, IH), 4.04-3.85 (m, 1 H), 2.39-2.2 (m, IH), 2.08-1.8 (m, 2H), 1.56-1.43 (m, IH), 1.42-1.35 (m, 8H), 1.3-1.05 (m, 4H).
MS (ESIpos): m/z = 573 (M+H)+
HO H3C HPLC (method 4): Rt = 3.57 min.
N H
43 jTN 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 _ O O// 10.07-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.9-8.79 (s, IH), N~N 7.91-7.8 (m, 2H), 7.63-7.18 (m, 9H), 4.4-4.24 (m, IH), 4.04-3.85 (m, 1 H), HaC-O CI 2.38-2.18 (m, IH), 2.04-1.82 (m, 2H), 1.57-1.29 (m, 11 H), 1.27-1.05 (m, 4H).
MS (ESlpos): m/z = 569 (M+H)+
HO C-~~ HPLC (method 4): R, = 2.33 min.
44 N "f~N 'H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): 6 0 O/ 10.04-9.9 (d, 1 H), 8.92-8.8 (s, 1 H), N~N 7.9-7.78 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.18 (m, 9H), 4.4-4.26 (m, IH), 4.03-3.85 (m, 1 H), H3C-O 0 2.58-2.54 (m, 3H), 2.4-2.19 (m, 1 H), H3C 2.07-1.81 (m, 2H), 1.58-1.31 (m, I I H), 1.27-1.05 (m, 4H).
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries B) Evaluation of the physiological activity The suitability of the compounds according to the invention for treating thromboembolic disorders can be demonstrated using the following assay systems:
In vitro enzyme assay Measurement of the thrombin inhibition To determine the thrombin inhibition of the substances listed above, a biochemical test system is used in which the conversion of a thrombin substrate is used for determining the enzymatic activity of human thrombin. Here, thrombin cleaves aminomethylcoumarin, which is measured fluorescently, from the peptic substrate. The determination is carried out in microtiter plates.
Substances to be tested are dissolved in various concentrations in dimethyl sulfoxide and incubated for 15 min with human thrombin (0.06 nmol/1 dissolved in 50 mmol/1 of Tris buffer [C,C,C-tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane], 100 mmol/l of NaCI, 0.1 % BSA [bovine serum albumin], pH 7.4) at 22 C. The substrate (5 mol/1 Boc-Asp(OBzI)-Pro-Arg-AMC from Bachem) is then added. After 30 min of incubation, the sample is excited at a wavelength of 360 nm and the emission is measured at 460 nm. The ineasured emissions of the test batches with test substance are compared to the control batches without test substance (only dimethyl sulfoxide instead of test substance in dimethyl sulfoxide) and the IC50 values are calculated from the concentration/activity relationships. Representative activity data from this test are listed in table A below:
Table A
Example No. ICSO InMI
39 5.1 42 0.48 44 1.9 BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Determination of the selectivity To demonstrate the selectivity of the substances with respect to thrombin inhibition, the test substances are examined for their inhibition of other human serin proteases, such as factor Xa, factor Xla, trypsin and plasmin. To determine the enzymatic activity of factor Xa (1.3 nmol/1 from Kordia), factor XIa (0.4 nmol/I from Kordia), trypsin (83 mU/ml from Sigma) and plasmin (0.1 g/ml from Kordia), these enzymes are dissolved (50 mmol/I of Tris buffer [C,C,C-tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane], 100 mmol/1 of NaCI, 0.1 % BSA [bovine serum albumin], 5 mmol/I of calcium chloride, pH 7.4) and incubated for 15 min with test substance in various concentrations in dimethyl sulfoxide and also with dimethyl sulfoxide without test substance. The enzymatic reaction is then started by addition of the appropriate substrates (5 mol/1 of Boc-Ile-Glu-Gly-Arg-AMC from Bachem for factor Xa and trypsin, 5 mol/1 of Boc-Glu(OBzI)-Ala-Arg-AMC from Bachem for factor XIa, 50 mol/1 of MeOSuc-Ala-Phe-Lys-AMC from Bachem for plasmin). After an incubation time of 30 min at 22 C, fluorescence is measured (excitation:
360 nm, emission: 460 nm). The measured emissions of the test batches with test substance are compared to the control batches without test substance (only dimethyl sulfoxide instead of test substance in dimethyl sulfoxide), and the IC50 values are calculated from the concentration/activity relationships.
Thrombin plasma assay In a 96-well flat-bottom plate, 20 l of substance dilution (in water) are mixed with 20 l of ecarin (ecarin reagent, from Sigma E-0504, final concentration 20 mU/ml, final concentration in the well 20 mU) in Ca buffer (200 mM Hepes + 560 mM NaCl + 10 mM CaC12 + 0.4% PEG). To the first 3 upper wells A1-A3, only Ca buffer is added; these samples serve as non-stimulated controls.
Furthermore, 20 [t] of fluorogenic thrombin substrate (from Bachem 1-1120, final concentration in the well 50 pM) and 20 l of citrate plasma (from Octapharma) are added to each well, and the mixtures are homogenized well. The plate is read in a Spectra fluor plus reader having a 360 nm excitation filter and a 465 nm emission filter every minute over a period of 20 min. The IC50 value is determined after about 12 minutes when 70% of the maximum value is reached.
Thrombin generation assay (thrombo2ram) The effect of the test substances on the thrombogram (Thrombin Generation Assay according to Hemker) is determined in vitro in human plasma (Octaplas(W from Octapharma).
In the thrombin generation assay according to Hemker, the activity of thrombin in coagulating plasma is determined by measuring the fluorescent cleavage products of the substrate 1-1140 BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries (Z-Gly-Gly-Arg-AMC, Bachem). The reactions are carried out in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvents. To start the reaction, reagents from Thrombinoscope (PPP reagent: 30 pM recombinant tissue factor, 24 M
phospholipids in HEPES) are used. Moreover, a thrombin calibrator from Thrombinoscope is used whose amidolytic activity is required for calculating the thrombin activity in a sample containing an unknown amount of thrombin. The test is carried out according to the specifications of the manufacturer (Thrombionscope BV): 4 pl of test substance or of the solvent, 76 l of plasma and 20 1 of PPP
reagent or thrombin calibrator are incubated at 37 C for 5 min. After addition of 20 l of 2.5 mM
thrombin substrate in 20 mM hepes, 60 mg/ml of BSA, 102 mM of CaClz, the thrombin generation is measured every 20 s over a period of 120 min. Measurement is carried out using a fluorometer (fluoroskan Ascent) from Thermo Electron fitted with a 390/460 nm filter pair and a dispenser.
Using the Thrombinoscope software, the thrombogram is calculated and represented graphically.
What is calculated are the following parameters: lag time, time to peak, peak, ETP (endogenous thrombin potential) and start tail.
Determination of the anticoa2ulatory activity The anticoagulatory activity of the test substances is determined in vitro in human plasma, rabbit plasma and rat plasma. To this end, blood is drawn off in a mixing ratio of sodium citrate/blood of 1/9 using a 0.11 molar sodium citrate solution as receiver. Immediately after the blood has been drawn off, it is mixed thoroughly and centrifuged at about 4000 g for 15 minutes. The supernatant is pipetted off.
The prothrombin time (PT, synonyms: thromboplastin time, quick test) is determined in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvent using a commercial test kit (Neoplastin from Boehringer Mannheim or Hemoliance RecombiPlastin from Instrumentation Laboratory). The test compounds are incubated with the plasma at 37 C for 3 minutes. Coagulation is then started by addition of thromboplastin, and the time when coagulation occurs is determined. The concentration of test substance which effected a doubling of the prothrombin time is detetermined.
The thrombin time (TT) is determined in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvent using a commercial test kit (Thrombin Reagent from Roche). The test compounds are incubated with the plasma at 37 C for 3 minutes. Coagulation is then started by addition of the thrombin reagent, and the time when coagulation occurs is determined. The concentration of test substance which effects a doubling of the thrombin time is determined.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries The activated partial thromboplastin time (APTT) is determined in the presence of varying concentrations of test substance or the corresponding solvent using a commercial test kit (PTT
reagent from Roche). The test compounds are incubated with the plasma and the PTT reagent (Cephalin, Kaolin) at 37 C for 3 minutes. Coagulation is then started by addition of 25 mM CaClz, and the time when coagulation occurs is determined. The concentration of test substance which effects a doubling of the APTT is determined.
Thromboelastographv (thromboelastogram) The thromboelastography is carried out with the aid of the thromboelastograph ROTEM from Pentapharm and its accessories, cup and pin. The measurement is carried out in whole blood drawn off beforehand into sodium citrate monovettes from Sarstedt. The blood in the monovettes is kept in motion using a shaker and preincubated at 37 C for 30 min. For the measurement, 20 l of CaCIZ solution from a 200 mM stock solution (diluted with 0.9% NaCI) are initially charged into the cups (final concentration 12.5 mM). 3.2 l of substance or solvent are added. The measurement is started by addition of 300 l of whole blood. After the addition, using the tip of the pipette, the mixture is briefly drawn into the pipette and released again without generating air bubbles. The measurement is carried out over a period of 2.5 hours or stopped when fibrinolysis sets in. For evaluation, the following parameters are determined: CT(clotting time/[sec.]), CFT (clotting formation time/[sec.]), MCF (maximum clot firmness/[mm]) and the alpha angle [
]. The measurement points are determined every 3 seconds and represented graphically, with the y axis for MCF [mm] and the x axis for time [sec.].
Arteriovenous shunt and hemorrha2e model (combi-model rat) Fasting male rats (strain: HSD CPB:WU) having a weight of 300-350 g are anesthetized using lnactin (150-180 mg/kg). Thrombin formation is initiated in an arteriovenous shunt in accordance with the method described by Christopher N. Berry et al., Br. J. Pharmacol.
(1994), 11i, 1209-1214. To this end, the left jugular vein and the right carotid artery are exposed. The two vessels are connected by an extracorporeal shunt using a polyethylene tube (PE
60) of a length of 10 cm. In the middle, this polyethylene tube is attached to a further polyethylene tube (PE 160) of a length of 3 cm which contains a roughened nylon thread arranged in the form of a loop, to form a thrombogenic surface. The extracorporeal circulation is maintained for 15 minutes. The shunt is then removed and the nylon thread with the thrombus is weighed immediately.
The weight of the nylon thread on its own is determined before the experiment has started.
To determine the bleeding time, immediately after opening of the shunt circulation, the tip of the tail of the rats is docked by 3 mm using a razor blade. The tail is then placed into physiological BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries saline kept at a temperature of 37 C, and the bleeding from the cut is observed over a period of 15 minutes. What is determined are the time until bleeding ceases for at least 30 seconds (initial bleeding time), total bleeding time over a period of 15 minutes (cumulative bleeding time) and the quantitative blood loss via photometric determination of the collected hemoglobin.
Before the extracorporeal circulation is set up and the tip of the tail is docked, the test substances are administered to the animals while awake either intravenously via the contralateral jugular vein as a single bolus or as a bolus with subsequent continuous infusion or orally using a pharyngeal tube.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries C) Exemplary embodiments of pharmaceutical compositions The compounds according to the invention can be converted into pharmaceutical preparations in the following ways:
Tablet:
Composition:
100 mg of the compound of Example 1, 50 mg of lactose (monohydrate), 50 mg of corn starch, mg of polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP 25) (from BASF, Germany) and 2 mg of magnesium stearate.
Tablet weight 212 mg. Diameter 8 mm, radius of curvature 12 mm.
Preparation:
10 The mixture of the compound of Example 1, lactose and starch is granulated with a 5% strength solution (m/m) of PVP in water. The granules are dried and then mixed with the magnesium stearate for 5 minutes. This mixture is compressed using a conventional tablet press (see above for format of the tablet).
Oral suspension:
Composition:
1000 mg of the compound of Example 1, 1000 mg of ethanol (96%), 400 mg of Rhodigel (xanthan gum) (from FMC, USA) and 99 g of water 10 ml of oral suspension are equivalent to a single dose of 100 mg of the compound according to the invention.
Preparation:
The Rhodigel is suspended in ethanol, and the compound of Example I is added to the suspension.
The water is added while stirring. The mixture is stirred for about 6 h until the swelling of the Rhodigel is complete.
BHC 06 1 168-Foreign Countries Solution for intravenous administration:
Composition:
I mg of the compound of Example 1, 15 g of polyethylene glycol 400 and 250 g of water for injection.
Preparation:
The compound of Example I is dissolved together with polyethylene glycol 400 in the water with stirring. The solution is sterilized by filtration (pore diameter 0.22 pm) and dispensed under aseptic conditions into heat-sterilized infusion bottles. The latter are closed with infusion stoppers and trimmed caps.
Claims (3)
1. A compound of the formula in which R1 represents phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio and C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl, R2 represents phenyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio and C1-4-alkylcarbonyl, R3 represents hydrogen, R4 represents C1-C6-alkyl, C2-C6-alkenyl or C3-C6-cycloalkyl, where alkyl and alkenyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring or a 1,3-thiazolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring and the 1,3-thiazolidine ring may be substituted by 1 or
2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, C1-C4-alkyl, C2-C4-alkenyl, C1-C4-alkoxy and C1-C4-alkylamino, R5 represents hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, amino, C1-C6-alkyl, C1-C6-alkoxy, alkylamino, C1-C6-alkylcarbonyloxy, C1-C6-alkylcarbonylamino or 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where alkyl and alkylamino may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, hydroxycarbonyl, C1-C6-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl and 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where heterocyclyl for its part may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio, C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and C1-C4-alkyl-carbonyloxy, and where heterocyclyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio, C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C4-alkyl-carbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and C1-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy and C1-C4-alkylamino, R6 represents phenyl, 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl, C3-C6-cycloalkyl or 5- to 7-membered heterocyclyl, where phenyl and heteroaryl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio, C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl-amino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, C1-C4-alkylsulfonyl and C1-C4-alkylsulfinyl, and where cycloalkyl and heterocyclyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio, C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, C1-alkylcarbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino and C1-C4-alkylcarbonyloxy, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula where * indicates the carbon atom to which R5 and R6 are attached, and R7 and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclopentane ring or cyclohexane ring, where the cyclopentane ring and the cyclohexane ring may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, CI-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy and C1-C4-alkylamino, and where R3 and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, or one of its salts, its solvates or the solvates of its salts.
The compound as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that R1 represents phenyl, pyridyl or pyrimidyl, where phenyl, pyridyl and pyrimidyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio and C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl, R2 represents phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl or imidazolyl, where phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and imidazolyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethyl, C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, R3 represents hydrogen, R4 represents C1-C6-alkyl or C3-C6-cycloalkyl, where alkyl may be substituted with 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, R5 represents hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, amino, C1-C6-alkyl, C1-C6-alkoxy, alkylamino, C1-C6-alkylcarbonyloxy, C1-C6-alkylcarbonylamino, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl or 4-(C1-C4-alkyl)piperazinyl, where alkyl and alkylamino may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, hydroxycarbonyl, C1-C6-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl, where pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl for their part may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C1-C4-alkyl, R6 represents phenyl, cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl or thiopyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, and where cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl and thiopyranyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, oxo, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkyl-carbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula where * indicates the carbon atom to which R5 and R6 are attached, and R7 and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R3 and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, or one of its salts, its solvates or the solvates of its salts.
The compound as claimed in claim 1 or 2, characterized in that R1 represents phenyl or pyridyl, where phenyl and pyridyl may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen and methoxy, R2 represents phenyl, pyridyl or thienyl, where phenyl and thienyl may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of fluorine, chlorine and bromine, R3 represents hydrogen, R4 represents isopropyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 methyl substituents, R5 represents hydrogen, C1-C4-alkyl or C1-C4-alkoxy, where alkyl may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, hydroxycarbonyl and C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 methyl substituents, R6 represents phenyl or 4-pyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula where * indicates the carbon atom to which R5 and R6 are attached, and R7 and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R3 and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, or one of its salts, its solvates or the solvates of its salts.
A process for preparing a compound of the formula (I) as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that according to process [A] a compound of the formula in which R1, R2, R3 and R4 have the meaning given in claim 1, is reacted with a compound of the formula in which R5 and R6 have the meaning given in claim 1 and Y1 represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine or iodine, or hydroxyl, or [B] a compound of the formula in which R1 and R2 have the meaning given in claim 1, is reacted with a compound of the formula in which R1, R4, R5 and R6 have the meaning given in claim 1, and Y2 represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine oder iodine, or hydroxyl.
5. The compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases.
6. The use of a compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 for preparing a medicament for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases.
7. The use of a compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 for preparing a medicament for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of thromboembolic disorders.
8. A medicament, comprising a compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 in combination with an inert non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary.
9. The medicament as claimed in claim 8 for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of cardiovascular disorders.
10. A method for treating cardiovascular disorders in humans and animals by administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to
The compound as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that R1 represents phenyl, pyridyl or pyrimidyl, where phenyl, pyridyl and pyrimidyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkylthio and C1-C4-alkylcarbonyl, R2 represents phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl or imidazolyl, where phenyl, pyridyl, thienyl, furyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl and imidazolyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, cyano, trifluoromethyl, C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, R3 represents hydrogen, R4 represents C1-C6-alkyl or C3-C6-cycloalkyl, where alkyl may be substituted with 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylamino and C3-C6-cycloalkyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, R5 represents hydrogen, halogen, hydroxyl, amino, C1-C6-alkyl, C1-C6-alkoxy, alkylamino, C1-C6-alkylcarbonyloxy, C1-C6-alkylcarbonylamino, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl or 4-(C1-C4-alkyl)piperazinyl, where alkyl and alkylamino may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, hydroxycarbonyl, C1-C6-alkylamino, C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl, where pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl and piperazinyl for their part may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C1-C4-alkyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of C1-C4-alkyl, R6 represents phenyl, cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl or thiopyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkylcarbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, and where cyclohexyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, pyranyl, piperidinyl and thiopyranyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino, cyano, oxo, hydroxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C4-alkyl, C1-C4-alkoxy, C1-C4-alkyl-carbonylamino, C1-C4-alkylaminocarbonyl and C1-C4-alkoxycarbonylamino, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula where * indicates the carbon atom to which R5 and R6 are attached, and R7 and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R3 and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, or one of its salts, its solvates or the solvates of its salts.
The compound as claimed in claim 1 or 2, characterized in that R1 represents phenyl or pyridyl, where phenyl and pyridyl may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen and methoxy, R2 represents phenyl, pyridyl or thienyl, where phenyl and thienyl may be substituted by 1 or 2 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of fluorine, chlorine and bromine, R3 represents hydrogen, R4 represents isopropyl, or R3 and R4 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidine ring, where the pyrrolidine ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 methyl substituents, R5 represents hydrogen, C1-C4-alkyl or C1-C4-alkoxy, where alkyl may be substituted by a substituent, where the substituent is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, hydroxycarbonyl and C1-C4-alkoxycarbonyl, or R4 and R5 are linked to one another and, together with the atoms to which they are attached, form a pyrrolidinone ring, where the pyrrolidinone ring may be substituted by 1 or 2 methyl substituents, R6 represents phenyl or 4-pyranyl, where phenyl may be substituted by 1 to 3 substituents, where the substituents independently of one another are selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl and C1-C4-alkoxy, or R5 and R6 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a group of the formula where * indicates the carbon atom to which R5 and R6 are attached, and R7 and R8 are linked to one another and, together with the carbon atom to which they are attached, form a cyclohexane ring, and where R3 and R5 are not both linked to R4 and where R4 and R6 are not both linked to R5, or one of its salts, its solvates or the solvates of its salts.
A process for preparing a compound of the formula (I) as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that according to process [A] a compound of the formula in which R1, R2, R3 and R4 have the meaning given in claim 1, is reacted with a compound of the formula in which R5 and R6 have the meaning given in claim 1 and Y1 represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine or iodine, or hydroxyl, or [B] a compound of the formula in which R1 and R2 have the meaning given in claim 1, is reacted with a compound of the formula in which R1, R4, R5 and R6 have the meaning given in claim 1, and Y2 represents halogen, preferably chlorine, bromine oder iodine, or hydroxyl.
5. The compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases.
6. The use of a compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 for preparing a medicament for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of diseases.
7. The use of a compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 for preparing a medicament for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of thromboembolic disorders.
8. A medicament, comprising a compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to 3 in combination with an inert non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary.
9. The medicament as claimed in claim 8 for the treatment and/or prophylaxis of cardiovascular disorders.
10. A method for treating cardiovascular disorders in humans and animals by administering a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound as claimed in any of claims 1 to
3, a medicament as claimed in claim 8 or a medicament obtained as claimed in claim 6 or 7.
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| DE102006048924A DE102006048924A1 (en) | 2006-10-17 | 2006-10-17 | Acylaminopyrazole |
| DE102006048924.1 | 2006-10-17 | ||
| PCT/EP2007/008657 WO2008046527A1 (en) | 2006-10-17 | 2007-10-05 | Acylaminopyrazoles for treating cardiovascular diseases |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CA2666401A1 true CA2666401A1 (en) | 2008-04-24 |
Family
ID=38705009
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CA002666401A Abandoned CA2666401A1 (en) | 2006-10-17 | 2007-10-05 | Acylaminopyrazoles for treating cardiovascular diseases |
Country Status (5)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| EP (1) | EP2102168A1 (en) |
| JP (1) | JP2010506864A (en) |
| CA (1) | CA2666401A1 (en) |
| DE (1) | DE102006048924A1 (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2008046527A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2010039947A1 (en) * | 2008-10-02 | 2010-04-08 | Abbott Laboratories | Novel compounds as calcium channel blockers |
| CN103947645B (en) * | 2009-10-12 | 2016-07-06 | 拜尔农作物科学股份公司 | 1-(pyridin-3-yl)-pyrazoles and 1-(pyrimidine-5-base)-pyrazoles as insecticide |
| US8815869B2 (en) | 2010-03-18 | 2014-08-26 | Abbvie Inc. | Lactam acetamides as calcium channel blockers |
| JP2015083542A (en) * | 2012-02-08 | 2015-04-30 | 大日本住友製薬株式会社 | Three substituted proline derivative |
| WO2013124335A1 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2013-08-29 | F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag | Antiviral compounds |
| RU2641916C2 (en) | 2012-10-02 | 2018-01-23 | Байер Кропсайенс Аг | Heterocyclic compounds as pesticides |
| PT3762368T (en) | 2018-03-08 | 2022-05-06 | Incyte Corp | Aminopyrazine diol compounds as pi3k-y inhibitors |
| WO2020010003A1 (en) | 2018-07-02 | 2020-01-09 | Incyte Corporation | AMINOPYRAZINE DERIVATIVES AS PI3K-γ INHIBITORS |
| CN114149381B (en) * | 2021-12-22 | 2024-07-23 | 欧阳瑞知 | Preparation method of 2, 3-dihydro-5-methyl-2-oxo-1, 3, 4-oxadiazole-3-acetone |
Family Cites Families (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| DE10124041A1 (en) * | 2001-05-16 | 2002-11-21 | Graffinity Pharm Design Gmbh | New peptide-type compounds, useful as protease, especially thrombin, inhibitors for treating e.g. thrombosis and cardiac infarct |
| AU2003263518A1 (en) * | 2002-10-09 | 2004-05-04 | Pfizer Products Inc. | Pyrazole compounds for treatment of neurodegenerative disorders |
| JP2006182648A (en) * | 2003-04-08 | 2006-07-13 | Dai Ichi Seiyaku Co Ltd | 7-membered heterocyclic derivative |
-
2006
- 2006-10-17 DE DE102006048924A patent/DE102006048924A1/en not_active Withdrawn
-
2007
- 2007-10-05 JP JP2009532701A patent/JP2010506864A/en active Pending
- 2007-10-05 CA CA002666401A patent/CA2666401A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-10-05 EP EP07818733A patent/EP2102168A1/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2007-10-05 WO PCT/EP2007/008657 patent/WO2008046527A1/en not_active Ceased
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| EP2102168A1 (en) | 2009-09-23 |
| WO2008046527A1 (en) | 2008-04-24 |
| JP2010506864A (en) | 2010-03-04 |
| DE102006048924A1 (en) | 2008-04-24 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CA2666401A1 (en) | Acylaminopyrazoles for treating cardiovascular diseases | |
| US20100105663A1 (en) | 2-(heteroaryl) alkyl indazole 6-phenyl and thienyl methyl amide as thrombin inhibitors | |
| JP4598771B2 (en) | Heterocyclic compounds | |
| CA2692178A1 (en) | Substituted oxazolidinones and use thereof | |
| CA2666177A1 (en) | Acylaminoimidazoles and acylaminothiazoles | |
| KR20160064100A (en) | Substituted phenylalanine derivatives | |
| US20160244437A1 (en) | Substituted phenylalanine derivatives | |
| CA2653666C (en) | Aryl-substituted heterocycles and their use | |
| US20160237067A1 (en) | Substituted phenylalanine derivatives | |
| EP2173744A1 (en) | Substituted (oxazolidinon-5-yl-methyl) -2-thiophene-carboxamides and use thereof in the field of blood coagulation | |
| WO2007140982A1 (en) | Substituted benzoxazoles | |
| JP6952044B2 (en) | New pyrrolidine derivative | |
| WO2007082666A1 (en) | Acylaminoimidazoles | |
| CA2653665A1 (en) | Isoindolin-1-one, isoindolin-3-one and isoindoline-1,3-dione-derivatives and their use | |
| KR20060036092A (en) | Pyrazoline as PARA-1 Antagonist to Treat Cardiovascular Disease |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| FZDE | Dead |